Operating Instructions - SEW-Eurodrive

*23019328_1017*Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services

Operating Instructions

Explosion-Proof AC MotorsEDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315IECEx

Edition 10/2017 23019328/EN

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world

Contents

Operating Instructions – EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 3

Contents1 General information.................................................................................................................. 6

1.1 About this documentation ............................................................................................... 61.2 Structure of the safety notes ........................................................................................... 61.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ............................................................................ 71.4 Exclusion of liability......................................................................................................... 81.5 Product names and trademarks...................................................................................... 81.6 Copyright notice .............................................................................................................. 81.7 Other applicable documentation ..................................................................................... 8

2 Safety notes .............................................................................................................................. 92.1 Preliminary information ................................................................................................... 92.2 User duties...................................................................................................................... 92.3 Target group ................................................................................................................. 102.4 Designated use ............................................................................................................. 112.5 Transportation/storage.................................................................................................. 122.6 Installation/assembly..................................................................................................... 122.7 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................... 142.8 Startup/operation .......................................................................................................... 15

3 Motor structure ....................................................................................................................... 163.1 Basic structure of EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors ......................................... 173.2 Basic structure of EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180 motors .................................... 183.3 Basic structure of EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 – 225 motors ....................................... 193.4 Basic structure of EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motors ....................................... 203.5 Basic structure of EDR..315, EDRN315 motors ........................................................... 213.6 Nameplate..................................................................................................................... 223.7 Type designation of EDR.., EDRN.. motors.................................................................. 263.8 Designs and options ..................................................................................................... 27

4 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................................... 304.1 Before you start............................................................................................................. 304.2 Extended storage of motors.......................................................................................... 314.3 Motor installation notes ................................................................................................. 334.4 Installation tolerances ................................................................................................... 354.5 Assembling the input elements ..................................................................................... 354.6 Encoder mounting adapter............................................................................................ 364.7 Terminal box ................................................................................................................. 404.8 Coating.......................................................................................................................... 474.9 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet ..................................... 474.10 Options.......................................................................................................................... 50

5 Electrical installation.............................................................................................................. 555.1 Additional regulations.................................................................................................... 555.2 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams.................................................... 555.3 Cable entries................................................................................................................. 565.4 Equipotential bonding ................................................................................................... 565.5 Wiring notes .................................................................................................................. 56

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

Contents

Operating Instructions – EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 3154

5.6 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter ............................................... 575.7 Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding................................................... 585.8 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding ............................................................ 595.9 Special aspects in switching operation ......................................................................... 625.10 Ambient conditions during operation............................................................................. 635.11 Motors of design 2G-b, 2D-b, 2GD-b, 3G-c, 3D-c and 3GD-c ...................................... 655.12 Notes regarding the connection of the motor................................................................ 665.13 Motor connection via terminal board............................................................................. 685.14 Connecting the motor via terminal strip ........................................................................ 735.15 Connecting the brake.................................................................................................... 745.16 Options.......................................................................................................................... 78

6 Operating modes and limit values ........................................................................................ 856.1 Permitted operating modes........................................................................................... 856.2 Line operation ............................................................................................................... 876.3 Frequency inverter operation ........................................................................................ 896.4 Safe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db" .......................... 916.5 Safe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc" ........................ 1016.6 Typical application ...................................................................................................... 1116.7 Special application ...................................................................................................... 1156.8 Group drive ................................................................................................................. 124

7 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 1257.1 Before startup ............................................................................................................. 1267.2 During startup ............................................................................................................. 1267.3 Parameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db".............. 1277.4 Parameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc" .............. 1337.5 Motors with backstop /RS ........................................................................................... 135

8 Inspection and maintenance ............................................................................................... 1368.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals......................................................................... 1388.2 Bearing lubrication ...................................................................................................... 1418.3 Reinforced bearings.................................................................................................... 1428.4 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work ...................................................... 1438.5 Inspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors....................... 1548.6 Inspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 brakemotor ............... 1618.7 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop .......................................... 183

9 Technical data....................................................................................................................... 1869.1 Braking torques........................................................................................................... 1869.2 Work done, working air gap, brake disk thickness...................................................... 1889.3 Operating currents ...................................................................................................... 1899.4 Resistances ................................................................................................................ 1929.5 Brake control............................................................................................................... 1989.6 Permitted work done by the BE brake for AC motors ................................................. 2049.7 Permitted work done by the BE brake in case of emergency off ................................ 2069.8 Permitted rolling bearings ........................................................................................... 2089.9 Lubricant tables........................................................................................................... 210 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

Contents


9.10 Order information for lubricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealants ......................... 2119.11 Encoder....................................................................................................................... 212

10 Malfunctions.......................................................................................................................... 21610.1 Motor malfunctions...................................................................................................... 21610.2 Brake malfunctions ..................................................................................................... 21810.3 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter............................................... 21910.4 Disposal ...................................................................................................................... 21910.5 Customer service ........................................................................................................ 220

11 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 22111.1 Wiring diagrams .......................................................................................................... 22111.2 Operation and maintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with part number

groups 2097... and 2098... .......................................................................................... 23211.3 Certificates .................................................................................................................. 238

12 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 239

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 250

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

1 General informationAbout this documentation


1 General information1.1 About this documentation

The current version of the documentation is the original.This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is written forall employees who assemble, install, start up, and service this product.Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons respons-ible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the productindependently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If youare unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further in-formation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.

1.2 Structure of the safety notes1.2.1 Meaning of signal words

The following table shows the graduation and meaning of the signal words for safetynotes.

Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregardedDANGER Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries

WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries

CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries

NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the product or its en-vironment

INFORMATIONON EXPLO-SION PROTEC-TION

Important information about ex-plosion protection

INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Sim-plifies handling of the product.

1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notesSection-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actionspertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazardor a specific hazard.This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:

SIGNAL WORDType and source of hazard.Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.• Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

1General informationRights to claim under limited warranty


Meaning of the hazard symbolsThe hazard symbols in the safety notes have the following meaning:

Hazard symbol MeaningGeneral hazard

Warning of hot surfaces

Warning of dangerous electrical voltage

Warning of risk of crushing

Warning of automatic restart

Warning of explosions

EX

Note on explosion protection

1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notesEmbedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the de-scription of the dangerous action.This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:

SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard. Possible consequence(s) if disreg-arded. Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.

1.3 Rights to claim under limited warrantyRead the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operationand fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentationbefore you start working with the product.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

1 General informationExclusion of liability


1.4 Exclusion of liabilityRead the information in this documentation, otherwise safe operation is impossible.You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to achieve thespecified product characteristics and performance features. SEW‑EURODRIVE as-sumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resultingfrom non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases,SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for defects.

1.5 Product names and trademarks

The brands and product names in this documentation are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of their respective titleholders.

1.6 Copyright notice

© 2017 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved. Unauthorized reproduction, modifica-tion, distribution or any other use of the whole or any part of this documentation isstrictly prohibited.

1.7 Other applicable documentationObserve the corresponding documentation for all further components.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

2Safety notesPreliminary information


2 Safety notes2.1 Preliminary information

The following general safety notes have the purpose to avoid injury and damage toproperty. They primarily apply to the use of products described in this documentation.If you use additional components also observe the relevant warning and safety notes.

2.2 User dutiesAs the user, you must ensure that the basic safety notes are observed and compliedwith. Make sure that persons responsible for the machinery and its operation as wellas persons who work on the device independently have read through the documenta-tion carefully and understood it.As the user, you must ensure that all of the work listed in the following is carried outonly by qualified specialists:• Setup and installation• Installation and connection• Startup• Maintenance and repairs• Shutdown• DisassemblyEnsure that the persons who work on the product pay attention to the following regula-tions, conditions, documentation, and information:• National and regional safety and accident prevention regulations• Warning and safety signs on the product• All other relevant project planning documents, installation and startup instructions,

and wiring diagrams• Do not assemble, install or operate damaged products• All system-specific specifications and conditionsEnsure that systems in which the product is installed are equipped with additionalmonitoring and protection devices. Observe the applicable safety regulations and le-gislation governing technical work equipment and accident prevention regulations.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

2 Safety notesTarget group


2.3 Target group

Specialist formechanical work

Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified specialists. Spe-cialists in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the design,mechanical installation, troubleshooting, and maintenance of the product who possessthe following qualifications:• Qualification in the mechanical area in accordance with the national regulations• Familiarity with this documentation

Specialist for elec-trotechnical work

Any electrotechnical work may only be performed by electrically skilled persons with asuitable education. Electrically skilled persons in the context of this documentation arepersons familiar with electrical installation, startup, troubleshooting, and maintenanceof the product who possess the following qualifications:• Qualification in the electrotechnical area in accordance with the national regula-

tions• Familiarity with this documentation

Additional qualific-ation

In addition to that, these persons must be familiar with the valid safety regulations andlaws, as well as with the requirements of the standards, directives, and laws specifiedin this documentation. The persons must have the express authorization of the com-pany to operate, program, parameterize, label, and ground units, systems, and circuitsin accordance with the standards of safety technology.

Instructed persons All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must becarried out by persons who are trained appropriately. The purpose of the instruction isthat the persons are capable of performing the required tasks and work steps in a safeand correct manner.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

2Safety notesDesignated use


2.4 Designated useThe explosion-proof electric motors are intended for industrial systems.When installed in machines, startup (i.e. start of designated operation) is prohibiteduntil it is determined that the machine complies with the local laws and directives ap-plicable in the country of use.

INFORMATION• The motor may only be operated under the conditions described in chapter

"Startup".• A motor may only be operated on a frequency inverter if the requirements of the

IECEx Certificate of Conformity and this documentation and the information on thenameplate of the motor are fulfilled.

• Make sure that there are no aggressive substances in the vicinity that could dam-age the paint and seals.

• The motors must not be operated in areas/applications that cause strong electricalcharge on the motor housing, e.g. a fan motor in a dust-transporting tube as thismay cause electrostatic charge of the coated surfaces.

Air-cooled versions are designed for ambient temperatures of -20 °C to +40 °C and in-stallation altitudes ≤ 1000 m above sea level. Any differing specifications on the name-plate must be observed. The ambient conditions must comply with all the specifica-tions on the nameplate.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

2 Safety notesTransportation/storage


2.5 Transportation/storage

Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Inform the ship-ping company immediately about any damage. If the product is damaged, it must notbe assembled, installed or started up.The lifting eyes are designed to carry only the weight of the motor without gear unit.Tighten the screwed-in lifting eyes. Mounted gear units have separate suspension at-tachments, which must be used according to the gear unit operating instructions whenlifting the gearmotor. Do not mount any additional loads.The installed lifting eyebolts are in accordance with DIN 580. Observe the loads andregulations specified there. The tension force vector of the slings must not exceed a45° angle in accordance with DIN 580.If necessary, use suitable, sufficiently dimensioned handling equipment.Observe the information on climatic conditions in chapter "Technical data" of the docu-mentation.Observe the following notes when transporting the device:• Always use lifting eyes if available.• Ensure that the product is not subject to mechanical impact.If the product is not immediately installed, it must be stored in a dry and dust-free loca-tion. The product can be stored for up to 9 months without requiring any special meas-ures before startup. Do not store the product outdoors.Do not transport or store the product on the fan guard.

2.6 Installation/assembly

Note the following points during installation:• Make sure that the supports are even, the foot and flange mounting is correct and

if there is direct coupling, align with precision.• Avoid resonance between the rotational frequency and the double supply system

frequency.• Release brake (for motors with mounted brake).• Turn the rotor by hand and listen for unusual grinding noise.• Check the direction of rotation in decoupled state.• Only install or remove belt pulleys and couplings using suitable devices (heat up).

Cover the belt pulleys and couplings with a touch guard. Avoid unacceptable belttension.

• Establish any necessary pipe connections.• Mounting positions with the shaft end pointing upward must be equipped with a

cover to prevent foreign objects from falling into the fan. Ensure that ventilationopenings are not obstructed and that used air cannot be drawn in again straightaway. The same applies to air from adjacent units.

Also observe the notes in the chapter "Mechanical installation".

2.6.1 Restrictions of useThe following applications are prohibited unless explicitly permitted:• Use in potentially explosive areas 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

2Safety notesInstallation/assembly


• Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, and radiation• Operation in applications with impermissibly high mechanical vibration and shock

loads in excess of the regulations stipulated in EN 61800-5-1

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

2 Safety notesElectrical connection


2.7 Electrical connectionAll work may only be carried out by qualified personnel. During work, the low-voltagemachine must be at standstill, de-energized, and safeguarded against accidental re-start. This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e.g. anti-condensation heating or forcedcooling fan).Exceeding the tolerances in IEC 60034-1 (VDE 0530, part 1) – voltage ±5%, fre-quency ±2%, curve shape, symmetry – increases the heating and influences electro-magnetic compatibility. Also observe IEC 60364 and EN 50110 (and, if applicable,other national regulations, such as VDE 0105 for Germany).In addition to the generally applicable installation regulations for low-voltage electricalequipment, you must observe the special regulations for the installation of electricalsystems in potentially explosive areas applicable in the country of use. In Australiaand New Zealand, relevant standards for hazardous locations are LV standard AS/NZS60079 and AS/NZS3000, in Brazil ABNT NBR IEC 60079 and IEC 60079-14.Observe the wiring information and differing data on the nameplate as well as the wir-ing diagram in the terminal box.The connection must be a permanently secure electrical connection (no protrudingwire ends); use the cable end equipment intended for this purpose. Establish a secureprotective earth connection. When the motor is connected, the distances between liveparts and between live and conductive parts must not be shorter than the minimumvalues according to IEC 60079-7, -15, and national regulations. The minimum valuesaccording to the respective standards must be observed, see the following table:

Protection type/protection level

Standard Minimum clearance at nominalvoltage VN

≤ 500 V > 500 V ≤ 690 Ve IEC 60079-7:2007 8 mm 10 mm

nA IEC 60079-15:2010 5 mm 5.5 mm

eb IEC 60079-7:2015 8 mm 10 mm

ec IEC 60079-7:2015 5 mm 5.5 mm

The connection box must be free from foreign objects, dirt, and humidity. Unusedcable entry openings and the box itself must be closed so that they are dust- and wa-ter-proof. Secure the key(s) for test mode without output elements. When operatinglow-voltage machines, check that the brake is functioning correctly before startup.Observe the notes in chapter "Electrical installation".

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

2Safety notesStartup/operation


2.8 Startup/operation

Risk of burns: The surface temperature of the product can exceed 60 °C during opera-tion. Do not touch the product during operation. Let the product cool down beforetouching it.Do not deactivate monitoring and protection devices of the machine or system evenfor a test run.Depending on the degree of protection, products may have live, uninsulated, andsometimes moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces during operation.Make sure that any existing transport protection is removed.In the event of deviations from normal operation, switch the product off. Possible devi-ations are increased temperatures, noise, or vibration, for example. Determine thecause. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary.Ensure that the terminal box is closed and screwed down before applying the supplyvoltage.Additional preventive measures may be required for applications with increased haz-ard potential. Be sure to check the effectiveness of the protection devices after everymodification.Mechanical blocking or internal safety functions of the product can cause a motorstandstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in thedrive re-starting automatically. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the drive-controlled machine, first disconnect the product from the supply system and then starttroubleshooting.

Operation with fre-quency inverter

The fact that the operation LED and other display elements are no longer illuminateddoes not indicate that the device has been disconnected from the supply system andno longer carries any voltage.Do not touch live components or power connections immediately after disconnectingthe device from the voltage supply because some capacitors may still be charged. Ad-here to a minimum switch-off time of 10 minutes. Observe the corresponding labels onthe device.When the device is switched on, dangerous voltages are present at all power connec-tions as well as at any connected cables and terminals. This also applies even whenthe product is inhibited and the motor is at standstill.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structure


3 Motor structureThe following figures are schematic representations. They are to facilitate the assign-ment of components to the spare parts list. Motor size and design may cause devi-ations.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3Motor structureBasic structure of EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors


3.1 Basic structure of EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..71 – 132,EDRN80 – 132S motors with cage clamp:

[117]

[118]

[116]

[119]

[122]

[123][132]

[131]

[137]

[262]

[616]

[124]

[129] [134]

[148]

[112]

[111]

[454]

[113]

[452]

[128]

[140]

[139]

[106]

[107]

[103] [93]

[9]

[7]

[12]

[1480]

[109]

[108]

[24]

[16] [41] [22]

[13]

[42]

[30] [35]

[706][715]

[705]

[716]

[707]

[100]

[90]

[2]

[10]

[11]

[3]

[36]

[44]

[32]

[1]

[90]

[91]

[93]

9007202186626955[1] Rotor [36] Fan [113] Pan head screw [139] Hex head screw[2] Retaining ring [41] Shim [116] Terminal clip [140] Lock washer[3] Key [42] B-side endshield [117] Hex head screw [148] Terminal clip[7] Flanged endshield [44] Deep groove ball bearing [118] Lock washer [262] Terminal[9] Screw plug [90] Bed plate [119] Pan head screw [392] Seal[10] Retaining ring [91] Hex nut [122] Tooth lock washer [452] Terminal strip[11] Deep groove ball bearing [93] Countersunk screw [123] Hex head screw [454] Support rail[12] Retaining ring [100] Hex nut [124] Tooth lock washer [616] Retaining plate[13] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Terminal clip [705] Canopy[16] Stator [106] Oil seal [129] Screw plug [706] Spacer[22] Hex head screw [107] Oil flinger [131] Gasket for cover [707] Pan head screw[24] Lifting eyebolt [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover [715] Blind rivet[30] Oil seal [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug [716] Washer[32] Retaining ring [111] Gasket for lower part [137] Screw [1480] O-ring[35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structureBasic structure of EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180 motors


3.2 Basic structure of EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..160 – 180,EDRN132M – 180 motors with anti-twist frame:

[123]

[124]

[132]

[131 ]

[122]

[1213]

[119]

[112]

[111]

[107]

[2]

[10]

[11]

[31]

[41][44]

[36][32]

[3]

[1]

[104][103]

[90]

[94]

[24]

[22]

[42]

[19]

[30] [30]

[715][705]

[706]

[707]

[108]

[109]

[17]

[93]

[14][15]

[100]

[106]

[7]

[12][9]

[16]

[219]

[118]

[116]

[117]

[129 ]

[134]

[128]

[262]

[616]

[137] [140]

[139]

[390]

9007202221938571[1] Rotor [30] Sealing ring [106] Oil seal [131] Seal for cover[2] Retaining ring [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover[3] Key [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug[7] Flange [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [139] Hex head screw[9] Screw plug [36] Fan [111] Seal for lower part [140] Washer[10] Retaining ring [41] Cup spring [112] Terminal box lower part [390] O-ring[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [219] Hex nut[12] Retaining ring [44] Deep groove ball bearing [117] Stud [705] Canopy[14] Washer [90] Foot [118] Washer [706] Spacer[15] Hex head screw [91] Hex nut [119] Cap screw [707] Hex head screw[16] Stator [93] Washer [122] Tooth lock washer [715] Hex head screw[17] Hex nut [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [1213] Kit 1)

[19] Cap screw [100] Hex nut [124] Tooth lock washer[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer[24] Lifting eyebolt [104] Supporting ring [129] Screw plug1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3Motor structureBasic structure of EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 – 225 motors


3.3 Basic structure of EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 – 225 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..200 – 225,EDRN200 – 225 motors with anti-twist frame:

[390]

[123][124]

[132][131 ]

[122][1213]

[119]

[112][111]

[129]

[219]

[118]

[116]

[117]

[128] [140]

[139]

[134]

[109][108]

[16]

[105][9]

[7]

[107]

[106]

[103][100]

[93]

[93]

[90]

[24]

[42] [22]

[19]

[26][25]

[30][35]

[715]

[706]

[707][705]

[2]

[11]

[3]

[1]

[31]

[21][44]

[43][40]

[36] [32]

9007202310009099[1] Rotor [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [131] Seal for cover[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover[3] Key [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [132] Terminal box cover[7] Flange [36] Fan [111] Seal for lower part [134] Screw plug[9] Screw plug [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [140] Washer[15] Cap screw [43] Supporting ring [117] Stud [390] O-ring[16] Stator [44] Deep groove ball bearing [118] Washer [219] Hex nut[19] Cap screw [90] Foot [119] Cap screw [705] Canopy[21] Oil seal flange [93] Washer [122] Tooth lock washer [706] Spacer bolt[22] Hex head screw [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [707] Hex head screw[24] Lifting eyebolt [100] Hex nut [124] Tooth lock washer [715] Hex head screw[25] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [1213] Kit 1)

[26] Shield ring [105] Cup spring [129] Screw plug[30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [131] Seal for cover1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structureBasic structure of EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motors


3.4 Basic structure of EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..250 – 280,EDRN250 – 280 motors with anti-twist frame:

[115]

[114]

[113]

[111]

[112]

[122]

[119] [131]

[124]

[123]

[132] [219]

[117][118]

[116]

[128]

[140][139]

[1453]

[162][161]

[129]

[134][159]

[160]

[1457][15]

[143]

[144]

[9]

[42] [19]

[26][25]

[30]

[35][22]

[24][108]

[109]

[705] [715]

[706]

[707]

[105]

[100][103]

[7]

[106][107] [90]

[93][94]

[16]

[2]

[11][3]

[1]

[31]

[44][43]

[40][36]

[32]

[21]

14397384075[1] Rotor [35] Fan guard [111] Seal for lower part [134] Screw plug[2] Retaining ring [36] Fan [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw[3] Key [40] Retaining ring [113] Cap screw [140] Washer[7] Flange [42] Rear endshield [114] Tooth lock washer [143] Adapter plate[9] Screw plug [43] Supporting ring [115] Kit 1) [144] Cap screw[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball bearing [116] Serrated lock washer [159] Connection piece[15] Cap screw [90] Foot [117] Stud [160] Connection piece seal[16] Stator [93] Washer [118] Washer [161] Hex head screw[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [119] Cap screw [162] Tooth lock washer[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [122] Tooth lock washer [219] Hex nut[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy[24] Lifting eyebolt [105] Compression spring [124] Tooth lock washer [706] Spacer bolt[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [128] Serrated lock washer [707] Hex head screw[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [129] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [131] Seal for cover [1457] Set screw[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [132] Terminal box cover [1453] Screw plug[32] Retaining ring1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts) 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

3Motor structureBasic structure of EDR..315, EDRN315 motors


3.5 Basic structure of EDR..315, EDRN315 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..315, EDRN315with anti-twist frame:

[115]

[114]

[113]

[111]

[112]

[122]

[119]

[131]

[132]

[124]

[123]

[117][116]

[118][219]

[128]

[140]

[139]

[160]

[162][161]

[129] [159]

[134]

[15][16]

[143]

[144]

[9]

[107][106][250]

[103]

[100]

[7]

[105][604]

[608][609]

[90] [93]

[94]

[109]

[108]

[24] [42][19]

[26][25]

[30]

[705][715]

[706]

[707]

[2]

[11]

[3]

[1]

[31]

[21]

[44][43]

[40]

[36]

[32]

[35][22]

[94][93][90]

9007213690531979[1] Rotor [35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer[2] Retaining ring [36] Fan [113] Cap screw [143] Adapter plate[3] Key [40] Retaining ring [114] Tooth lock washer [144] Cap screw[7] Flange [42] Rear endshield [115] Kit 1) [159] Connection piece[9] Screw plug [43] Supporting ring [116] Serrated lock washer [160] Connection piece seal[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball bearing [117] Stud [161] Hex head screw[15] Cap screw [90] Foot [118] Washer [162] Tooth lock washer[16] Stator [93] Washer [119] Cap screw [219] Hex nut[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [122] Tooth lock washer [250] Oil seal[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [604] Lubrication ring[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [124] Tooth lock washer [608] Oil seal flange[24] Lifting eyebolt [105] Cup spring [128] Serrated lock washer [609] Oil seal[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [129] Screw plug [705] Canopy[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [131] Seal for cover [706] Spacer bolt[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover [707] Hex head screw[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw[32] Retaining ring [111] Seal for lower part [139] Hex head screw1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structureNameplate


3.6 Nameplate3.6.1 EDR../EDRN.. motor nameplate

The following figure shows an example nameplate of a motor:

A

eff %rpm

Made in GermanyTh.Cl

IS/INkW

Hz01.1971553001.0001.14EDRE200L4/FF/2GD-b/TF/AL

1480

C° UTIL 130(B)

400/690 Δ/Y22 S1 43.5/25.0 0.82Cosφ

92.650

155(F) 3~IEC60034-1 Zone A

Ex e IIC T3 Gb

B5kg 256.876 -20..40

IECEx PTB 11.004/07

IMTa Jahr 2014

Ex tb IIIC T120°C Db

V 7.5tE s 11

IP 65

[1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[2]

[7]

[8]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[2]

[7]

[8]

20252091659

Line Information[1] • Manufacturer, address

• IECEx marking and the number of the approval authorityThe identification on the upper edge of the nameplate are only presentwhen the motor has been certified accordingly or when it includes the rel-evant components.

[2] • Type designation

[3] • Serial number• Certificate number IECEx for line operation• Rated efficiency for motors included in the scope of the IEC 60034-30-1

standard

[4] • Rated frequency• Rated speed• Nominal voltage• Relation between starting current and rated current

[5] • Rated power, operating mode• Rated current• Power factor for AC motors• Heating time

[6] • Ex e = Protection typeIIC = Gas groupT3 = temperature class (gas)Gb = EPL (Equipment Protection Level)

• Ex tb = protection typeIIIC = dust groupT120°C = surface temperature (dust)Db = EPL (Equipment Protection Level) 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

3Motor structureNameplate


Line Information[7] • Mounting position

• Degree of protection according to IEC 60034-5• Thermal class• Number of phases and underlying rating and performance standards

(IEC 60034-X and/or equivalent national standard)• Zone A = Section A from IEC 60034-1

[8] • Motor weight/gearmotor• Ambient temperature• Thermal capacity utilization of the motor• Year of manufacture• Country of manufacture

3.6.2 Additional nameplate for EDR../EDRN.. motors in frequency inverter operationThe following figure shows an example of the additional nameplate for an EDRS motorin design 2GD-b for frequency inverter operation (short additional FI nameplate):

Usys01.4343689427.0001.14EDRS71M4/FF/2GD-b/KCC/TF/AL

400IECEx PTB 11.0039/04X

V

VFC Imax 2.75 A VFC Imax 1.57 A

Hz r/min V A Nm Hz r/min V A Nm

5 90 35 1.40 1.6 5 90 60 0.80 1.6

10 200 54 1.40 1.8 10 200 93 0.80 1.8

25 590 115 1.80 2.5 25 590 200 1.04 2.5

75 2110 346 1.80 2.6 50 1370 400 1.01 2.5

87 2110 400 1.20 1.4

[A]

[B]

[E]

[C]

[D]

[1]

[3]

[4][2]

20252318987

Line Information[1] System voltage – line voltage of frequency inverter

[2] (Voltage Mode Flux Control) Voltage controlled control mode of the frequencyinverter and type of wiring

[3] Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC) for frequency inverter operation

[4] Maximum permitted peak current, e.g. when accelerating with VFC controlmode

[A]The additional FI nameplate lists the thermal limit characteristic curve of themotor (item A – E) considering voltage and frequency, see chapter "Limitcharacteristic curves of EDR.., EDRN.. motors in inverter opera-tion" (→ 2 112)The minimum and maximum frequency may deviate depending on the option.

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structureNameplate


3.6.3 Additional nameplate motors with approval for Brazil according to ABNT/INMETRO

01.4343150102.0001.17

3~ABNT-NBR17094-1

13642618 DE

220.0 V 380.0 VMotor de indução gaiola

CAT D IA/IN 6,4

Ex e IIC T3 Gb

tE s

DNV15.0148 DNV15.0158X

Ex tb IIIC T120°C Db

60

U1 V1 W1

W2 U2 V2

U1 V1 W1

W2 U2 V2

+CW

OCP0017

[1]

[3][4][5]

[2]

[7]

[9][10]

[11]

[6]

[8]

6309-2Z-C3

6209-2Z-C3

9007218145228683

Line Information[1] • Serial number

[2] • Used rolling bearings• Direction of rotation, for motors with fixed direction of rotation

[3] • Motor standard

[4] • Startup Behavior• Relation between starting current and rated current

[5] • Motor type: Induction motor with squirrel-cage rotor

[6] • INMETRO logo, ExCB logo and number

[7] • Heating time

[8] • Explosion protection identification

[9] • Certificate numbers

[10] • Energy efficiency class

[11] • Wiring diagrams

Warning label according to INMETRO

1364 283 9

NÃO ABRA QUANDOENERGIZADO

ATENÇÃO

18890478475

Packaging label according to INMETRO

Segurança

Compulsório

1364 262 6

OCP0017

9007218144321035

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3Motor structureNameplate


3.6.4 MarkingsThe following table lists all markings that can be given on a nameplate or attached tothe motor and an explanation of what they mean.

Marking MeaningIECEx conformity marking. Confirmation of the conformity by a notifiedauthority (PTB in Braunschweig, Germany)

OCP0017

Conformity marking INMETRO. Confirmation of the conformity forBrazil by DNV in São Paulo, Brazil.

12-AV4BO-0552 Conformity marking KOSHA with the approval number. Confirmation ofthe conformity for Korea by KOSHA in Ulsan, REPUBLIC OF KOREA

02

FS mark with code number to identify functional safety relevant com-ponents

≥ 90° C

13

61

52

7 1

For operation with an inverter or at ambient temperatures > 40 °C,cable entries and cables must be used that are suited for temperaturesof ≥ 90 °C. The used cables must be selected regarding their temperat-ure resistance according to standard requirements and operating con-ditions.

Special indication "X"If the special indication "X" appears after the certificate number on the Certificate ofConformity (IECEx CoC), this indicates the certificate contains special conditions forthe safe application of the motors.For motors of the equipment protection level b, inverter operation is regarded as aspecial operating condition. For this reason, the special indication "X" is included afterthe certificate number. The special operating conditions include the permitted speedrange, as well as the inverter properties defined in the IECEx Certificate of Conformity(IECEx CoC).

3.6.5 Serial numberThe following table lists the structure of a serial number:

Example: 01. 12212343 01. 0001. 1601. Sales organization

12212343 Order number (8 digits)

01. Order item (2 digits)

0001 Quantity (4 digits)

16 End digits of the year of manufacture (2 digits)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structureType designation of EDR.., EDRN.. motors


3.7 Type designation of EDR.., EDRN.. motorsThe following diagram shows the structure of the motor type designation:

EDRS71S4 /BE2 /FI /3GD-c /KCC /TF /ES7SE Explosion-proof design

DR Product family

S Code for product line identification

71S Size and length

4 Number of poles

/BE2 Brake

/FI Output options

/3GD-c Explosion protection design

/KCC Alternative connections

/TF Thermal motor protection

/ES7S Encoder

3.7.1 Designation of the motors

DesignationEDRS.. Explosion-proof AC motor, Standard Efficiency IE1

EDRE.. Explosion-proof AC motor, High Efficiency IE2

EDRN.. Explosion-proof AC motor, Premium Efficiency IE3

71 to 315 Sizes: 71, 80, 90, 100, 112, 132, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280,315

S, M, L, LC, ME, H, LS, LM, K

Lengths

4 Number of poles

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3Motor structureDesigns and options


3.8 Designs and options

3.8.1 Explosion-proof motorsThe following table shows the relation between the design and the equipment protec-tion level/EPL:

Design Equipment protection level EPL IEC 60079-01)

/2G-b Gb

/2D-b Db

/2GD-b Gb, Db

/3G-c Gc

/3D-c Dc

/3GD-c Gc, Dc1) 1 The abbreviation "EPL" stands for "Equipment Protection Level".

3.8.2 Output typesThe following table shows possible output designs:

Designation Design Option/FI

/2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

IEC foot-mounted motor

/F.A, /F.B Universal foot-mounted motor

/FG 7-series integral motor, as stand-alone motor

/FF IEC flange-mounted motor with bore

/FT IEC flange-mounted motor with threads

/FL General flange-mounted motor (other than IEC)

/FM 7-series integral motor with IEC feet

/FE IEC flange-mounted motor with bore and IEC feet

/FY IEC flange-mounted motor with threads and IEC feet

/FK General flange-mounted motor (deviating from IEC) with feet

/2W 2nd shaft end on the motor/brakemotor

3.8.3 Mechanical attachmentsThe following table shows possible mechanical attachments:

Designation Design Option/BE..

/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Spring-loaded brake with specification of size

HR Manual brake release of the brake, re-engaging

HF Manual brake release, lockable

/RS /2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Backstop

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3 Motor structureDesigns and options


3.8.4 Temperature sensor/temperature detectionThe following table shows the thermal protection options:

Designation Design Option/TF

/2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Temperature sensor (PTC thermistor or PTC resistor)

/KY 1 KTY84 – 130 sensor

/PK PT1000 temperature sensor

/PT 1 or 3 PT100 sensor(s)

3.8.5 EncoderThe following table shows possible encoder designs:

Designation Design Option/ES7S , /EG7S, /EV7S

/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Add-on speed sensor with sin/cos interface

/ES7R , /EG7R, /EV7R

Add-on speed sensor with TTL (RS422) interface

/ES7C , /EG7C /EV7C

Add-on speed sensor with HTL interface

/AS7., /AG7W, /AV7W

Mounted absolute encoder, RS-485 interface (multi-turn)

/AS7Y, /AG7Y, /AV7Y

Add-on absolute encoder, SSI interface (multi-turn)

/ES7A /EG7A Mounting adapter for speed sensors with solid shaft

/XV.A Mounting adapter for third-party encoders

/XV.. Mounted third-party encoders

3.8.6 Connection optionsThe following table shows alternative designs of the power connection. Designs withterminal board do not have an extra type designation.

Designation Design Included in the scope of delivery/KCC /2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b

/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-cTerminal strip with cage clamps (EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 –132S motors)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

3Motor structureDesigns and options


3.8.7 StorageThe following table shows possible bearings for motors:

Designation Design Option/NS

/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Relubrication device

/ERF Reinforced bearings on A-side with cylindrical roller bearing

/NIB Insulated bearing B-side

3.8.8 VentilationThe following table shows possible ventilation variants:

Designation Design Option/VE /3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c Forced cooling fan

/AL /2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Metal fan

None /2G-b, /3G-c Standard fan (plastic)

/C /2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-c

Canopy for fan guard

3.8.9 Other additional featuresThe following table shows further additional feature:

Designation Design Option/2W /2G-b, /2D-b, /2GD-b

/3G-c, /3D-c, /3GD-cSecond shaft end on the motor

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationBefore you start


4 Mechanical installation

INFORMATIONObserve the safety notes in chapter 2 of these operating instructions for mechanicalinstallation.

4.1 Before you start

INFORMATIONThe mounting position for installation must correspond with the specifications on thenameplate.

Only install the drive if the following conditions are met:• The specifications on the nameplate of the drive correspond to the supply system

or the output voltage of the frequency inverter• The drive is undamaged (no damage caused by transport or storage)• All transport protection has been removed• You are certain that the following requirements have been met:

– Ambient temperature according to the nameplate.Note that you can also limit the temperature range of the gear unit (see gearunit operating instructions).Any differing specifications on the nameplate must be observed.

– No oils, acids, gases, vapors, dusts, radiations, etc.– Installation altitude max. 1000 m above sea level

Observe the chapter Designated use in chapter 2.– Note the restrictions for encoders– Special design: Drive configured in accordance with ambient conditions.

The above mentioned information refers to standard orders. The conditions might bedifferent when you order drives other than the standard. Observe any differing condi-tions in the order confirmation.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationExtended storage of motors


4.2 Extended storage of motors• Note that the service life of the lubricant in the ball bearings is reduced by 10% per

year after the first year of storage.• You should re-lubricate the lubrication devices on motors that have been in stor-

age for longer than 5 years before startup. Observe the information on the motorlubricant plate.

• Check whether the motor has absorbed moisture as a result of being stored for along time. Measure the insulation resistance for this purpose (measuring voltage500 V).

The insulation resistance (see the following figure) varies greatly depending onthe temperature. The motor must be dried if the insulation resistance is insuffi-cient.

100

10

1

0,10 20 40 60 80

[ ˚C ]

[M ]

173323019

If the measured resistance, depending on the ambient temperature, is in a rangeabove the limit characteristic curve, the insulation resistance is sufficient. If the valueis below the limit characteristic curve, the motor must be dried.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationExtended storage of motors


4.2.1 Drying the electric cylinderHeat the motor:• with hot air or• using an isolation transformer

– Connect the windings in series (see following figures)– Auxiliary AC voltage supply max. 10% of the nominal voltage with max. 20% of

the rated current

Connection in wiring diagram R13:

[1]

[1] Transformer

Connection with wiring diagram C13:

[1]

[1] Transformer

The drying process is finished when the minimum insulation resistance has been at-tained.In the terminal box check that:• the inside is clean and dry• the connections and fastening parts are free from corrosion• the gasket and sealing surfaces are functioning• the cable glands are sealed, if not, clean or replace them

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationMotor installation notes


4.3 Motor installation notes

CAUTIONSharp edges due to open keyway.Cuts.• Insert the key into the keyway.• Pull a protective tubing over the shaft.

NOTICEPossible damage to the motor due to improper mounting.The drive system might be damaged.• Observe the notes in this chapter.

• The mounting position for installation must correspond with the specifications onthe nameplate.

• Thoroughly clean the motor shaft ends and make sure that they are free from anti-corrosion agent, dirt or the like (use commercially available solvent). Do not allowthe solvent to penetrate the bearings or shaft seals – this could damage the mater-ial.

• Mount the gearmotor only on a level, vibration-free and torsionally rigid supportstructure.

• Make sure the customer's counter-bearing is unobstructed and can move freely.• Align the motor and the driven machine carefully in order to prevent the output

shaft from being exposed to unacceptable strain. Observe the permitted overhungand axial forces.

• Do not jolt or hammer the shaft end.• Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with a half key (motor

shafts are balanced with a half key).• Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the motor to provide for ad-

equate cooling air supply, and that the motor does not draw in warm exhaust airfrom other units. Observe the following minimum clearance:

h

2963373195

Motors h in mmEDR..71 – 80, EDRN80 15

EDRE90 – 100, EDRN90 – 100 20

EDRE112 – 132, EDRN112 – 132S 25

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationMotor installation notes


Motors h in mmEDRE160, EDRN132M/L 30

EDRE180, EDRN180 35

EDRE200 – 225, EDRN200 – 225 45

EDRE250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 50

EDRE315, EDRN315 55

INFORMATION• If using belt pulleys:

– Only use belts that do not build up an electrostatic charge.– Do not exceed the maximum permitted overhung load.

• Motors in vertical mounting position (e.g. M4/V1) are equipped with a canopy /Cas standard. On request, the motor can be delivered without canopy. In this case,you have to install a cover when you install the drive in the plant/machine in orderto prevent objects from falling into the ventilation openings. Observe the require-ments according to IEC 60079-0 and IEC 60079-7. This cover must not obstructthe cooling air supply.

• In mounting positions with the motor output shaft pointing upwards (e.g. M2/V3), asuitable cover must prevent small objects from falling through the fan guard, seealso IEC 60079-0. This cover must not obstruct the cooling air supply.

INFORMATIONTo mount EDR../EDRN.. motors with a foot made of aluminum, you have to usewashers with an outer diameter that is at least twice the bolt diameter (e.g.DIN EN ISO 7090). Use bolts of strength class 8.8 up to max. 10.9. Tightening torqueaccording to VDI 2230-1.For EDRN.. motors: The maximum bolt length for EDRN80 – 90 motors = M8×20,for EDRN100 – 132S motors = M10×25.

4.3.1 Installation in damp locations or outdoors• Use suitable cable glands for the incoming cable (use reducing adapters if neces-

sary) according to the installation instructions.• If possible, arrange the terminal box in such a way that the cable entries are point-

ing downwards.• Seal the cable entry properly.• Clean the sealing surfaces of the terminal box and the terminal box cover carefully

before re-assembly; replace embrittled gaskets.• If required, touch up the corrosion protection (especially at the eyebolts).• Check the degree of protection.• Protect the shaft against corrosion using a suitable anti-corrosion agent.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationInstallation tolerances


4.4 Installation tolerances

Shaft end FlangesDiameter tolerance according toEN 50347• ISO j6 with Ø ≤ 28 mm• ISO k6 with Ø ≥ 38 mm up to ≤

48 mm• ISO m6 at Ø ≥ 55 mm• Centering bore according to DIN 332,

shape DR

Centering shoulder tolerance accordingto EN 50347• ISO j6 with Ø ≤ 250 mm• ISO h6 with Ø ≥ 300 mm

4.5 Assembling the input elementsDrive components that are installed on the motor shaft end, e.g. pinions, must bewarmed up prior to assembly in order to prevent damage, e.g. to the encoder of stand-alone motors.

WARNINGUnsecured key skidding out of the keyway.Severe or fatal injuries due to flying parts.• Only operate the motor with attached customer output element (e.g. gear unit), or

with a suitably secured key.

WARNINGGenerating of sparks due to unsecured key.Severe or fatal injuries from explosion.• Only operate the motor with attached customer output element (e.g. gear unit), or


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationEncoder mounting adapter


4.6 Encoder mounting adapterIf a drive was ordered with encoder mounting adapter, SEW‑EURODRIVE will deliverthe drive with enclosed coupling. Do not connect the coupling for operation without theencoder.

4.6.1 XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter to EDR..71 – 225, EDRN80 – 225 motorsIf you have ordered the XV.. or EV.. encoder mounting adapter, the adapter [A] andthe coupling [B – E] are enclosed with the motor and are to be assembled by the cus-tomer.The following figure shows how to assemble the coupling and the adapter:

[361] / [170][269]

[212]

[225]

[251] [232]

[D]

[D]

[220] [22]

[E][F] [C] [B] [A]

[E] [C] [B] [A]

3633163787

[22] Screw [361] Extended fan guard[170] Forced cooling fan guard [269] Grommet[212] Fan guard with encoder mount [A] Adapter[220] Encoder [B] Retaining screw[225] Intermediate flange (not with XV1A) [C] Central retaining screw[232] Screws (only with XV1A and XV2A) [D] Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)[251] Conical spring washers (only with XV1A

and XV2A)[E] Retaining screw[F] Screw

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationEncoder mounting adapter


Mounting the XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter to EDR..71 – 225, EDRN80 – 225 motors

1. If available, remove extended fan guard [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].2. For XV2A, XV3A, and XV4A: Remove intermediate flange [225].3. Screw in the coupling [D] into the encoder bore of the motor shaft with the screw

[C].DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S motors: Tighten the screw [C] with a tighteningtorque of 3 Nm.DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225 motors: Tighten the screw [C] with a tighteningtorque of 8 Nm.

4. Push the adapter [A] on the encoder [220] and tighten it with the retaining screw[B] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.

5. For XV2A and XV4A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] with the screw [F] witha tightening torque of 3 Nm.

6. Push the encoder and the adapter on the coupling [D] and tighten the retainingscrew [E] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.

7. For XV1A, XV3A, and XV2A: Arrange conical spring washers [251] with retainingscrews [232] and place in annular groove of the encoder [220] and tighten with atightening torque of 3 Nm.

8. For XV3A and XV4A: Installation by the customer via the bores in the encoderplate.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationEncoder mounting adapter


4.6.2 XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter to EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motorsIf you have ordered the XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter, the coupling [233] is en-closed with the motor and must be installed by the customer.The following figure shows an example of how the coupling is installed:

[A][1458]

[233][225]

[226][220]

[251][232]

[269]

[34][33]

[361]

[35]

[22]

[1459]

[1460] [1461] [1462]

[1489]

[1498]

[1497]

[1496]

9007206970704907

[22] Screw [361] Safety cover (normal/long)[33] Washer [1458] Screw[34] Screw [1459] Cage nut[35] Fan guard [1460] Serrated lock washer[220] Encoder [1461] Washer[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [1462] Screw[226] Screw [1489] Ground strap[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A and .V2A) [1496] Serrated lock washer[233] Coupling [1497] Washer[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed with .V1A

and .V2A)[1498] Screw

[269] Grommet [A] Encoder mounting adapter23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

4Mechanical installationEncoder mounting adapter


Mounting encoders in XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter to EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motors

1. Remove safety cover [361], if installed. Loosen screws [34].• With forced cooling fan option /VE: Remove forced cooling fan guard [170].

Loosen screws [22].2. Push the coupling [233] with diameter 14 mm onto the pin of the encoder mounting

adapter [A]. Tighten the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] with 3 Nmthrough the slots in the encoder mounting adapter [A].

3. If applicable, mount the intermediate flange [225] to the encoder mounting adapter[A] with screws [226]. The tightening torque must be 3 Nm.

4. Mount the conical spring washers [251] to the encoder mounting adapter [A] withscrews [232]. Do not tighten the screws [232] yet.

5. Mount the encoder [220] to the encoder mounting adapter [A] or intermediateflange [225]. Insert the encoder shaft [220] into the coupling [233]. Turn the conicalspring washers in the encoder [220] fixture. Tighten screws [232] with 3 Nm.Tighten the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the encoder end with3 Nm.

6. Pull the cable of the encoder [220] through the cable grommet [269]. Insert thecable grommet [269] into the extended fan guard [361].• With forced cooling fan option /VE: Insert the cable grommet into the forced

cooling fan guard [170].7. Mount the extended fan guard to the fan guard with screws [34] and washers [33].

• With forced cooling fan option /VE: Mount the forced cooling fan guard [170]with screws [22].

4.6.3 XH.A encoder mounting adapterThe XH1A, XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapters for hollow shaft encoders arepremounted on delivery.To mount the encoder, proceed as described in chapter "Motor and brake mainten-ance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationTerminal box


4.7 Terminal box4.7.1 Turning the terminal box

Terminal box with cage clamp power connections /KCCThe following figure shows the terminal box option with cage clamps /KCC:

[123]

[131]

[119]

[117]

[b]

[113]

[c]

[111]

[140]

[a]

[a1]

[a2]

27021600516465931

[111] Gasket[113] Pan head screw mounting rail[117] Hex head screw for grounding inside[119] Terminal box retaining screws + tooth lock washers (4 x each)[123] Terminal box cover retaining screws + tooth lock washers (4 x each)[131] Gasket[140] Hex head screw for grounding outside[a] Terminal strip 1[a1] Screw of option terminal / rectifier[a2] Flat head screw for option terminal[b] Terminal strip 2 + retaining plate[c] Power terminal

The type and number of terminal strips varies with the terminal box design and the op-tions.Proceed as follows to turn the terminal box:1. Loosen the screws [123] from the terminal box cover and remove the cover.2. Loosen the retaining screws [119] and the terminal box.3. Clean the sealing surfaces at the stator shoulder, the terminal box lower part and

cover.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationTerminal box


4. Check the gaskets [111] and [131] for damage and replace them if necessary.5. Position the terminal box as desired.6. If the terminal strip 2 [b] has been installed with the retaining screws of the terminal

box [119], it must be mounted again to the face of the power terminal after the ter-minal box has been turned.

INFORMATIONConnection alternatives for 2 terminal strips [a] and [b] are listed in the appendix.

7. Fasten the terminal box lower part with the screws [119] and the tooth lock wash-ers with one of the following tightening torques:• EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: 5 Nm

8. Fasten the terminal box cover with the screws [123] and tooth lock washers usingthe appropriate tightening torque. Make sure the gasket is seated correctly.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Terminal box with terminal board and anti-twist frameThe following figure shows a terminal box with anti-twist frame:

Terminal stud M6/M8 in aluminum or gray castiron design

Terminal stud M12S in gray cast iron design

[123]

[b]

[a1]

[131]

[119]

[117]

[a]

[a1]

[a2]

[140]

[111]

[119]

[140]

[2][1213]

[2]

[1213]

[1222]

54043198347511563

[2] Terminal stud nut[111] Gasket[117] Hex head screw for grounding inside[119] Terminal box retaining screws + tooth lock washers (4 x each)[123] Terminal box cover retaining screws + tooth lock washers (4 x each)[131] Gasket[140] Hex head screw for grounding outside[1222] Spacer bushing[a] Terminal strip 1[a1] Screw of option terminal / rectifier[a2] Flat head screw for option terminal[1213] Kit (1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

The type and number of terminal strips varies with the terminal box design and the op-tions.Proceed as follows to turn the terminal box:1. Loosen the screws [123] from the terminal box cover and remove the cover.2. Remove the retaining screws [119] of the terminal box.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



3. Clean the sealing surfaces at the stator shoulder as well as at the terminal boxlower part and cover.

4. Check the gaskets [111] and [131] for damage and replace them if necessary.5. Take the unit consisting of terminal board and anti-twist frame from the terminal

box.Remove any cables that are already connected before taking out the unit.

6. Position the terminal box as desired.7. Turn the unit consisting of terminal board and anti-twist frame in the same way as

the terminal box and put it back in. Install the spacer bushings [1222] below theterminal board.The terminal board designations U1, V1 and W1 must be pointing towards thecable outputs afterwards.

8. Fasten the terminal box lower part with the screws [119] and the tooth lock wash-ers with one of the following tightening torques:• EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: 6.5 Nm• EDR..160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors: 27.3 Nm

9. Re-connect any removed cables according to the following table:Yellow White Brown Black Red BlueW2/T4 U2/T5 V2/T6 U1/T1 V1/T2 W1/T3

10. Tighten the nuts on the terminal studs with the appropriate "tighteningtorque" (→ 2 46).

WARNINGElectric shock due to damaged cables.Severe or fatal injuries.• When installing the terminal box lower part or the terminal board, make sure the

cables are not crushed or twisted.• Do not use sharp or pointed objects (such as screwdrivers) to align the cables.• When the assembly is complete, perform an insulation test to make sure the

cables were not damaged. See chapter "Extended storage of motors" (→ 2 31).• Observe the correct sequence of the small connection parts. See chapter "Motor

connection via terminal board" (→ 2 68).

11. Fasten the terminal box cover with the screws [123] and lock washers using theappropriate tightening torque, see chapter "Tightening torques" (→ 2 46). Makesure the gasket is seated correctly.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Terminal box with and without anti-twist frame for EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 motorsThe following figure shows a terminal box with anti-twist frame:M12S terminal stud with anti-twist frame in graycast iron design

M16 terminal stud without anti-twist frame ingray cast iron design

[111]

[119]

[b1]

[b] [a]

[a1]

[131]

[123]

[140]

[2] [117]

[2]

9007212505618955

[2] Terminal stud nut[111] Gasket[117] Hex head screw for grounding inside[119] Terminal box retaining screws + tooth lock washers (4 x each)[123] Terminal box cover retaining screws + tooth lock washers (4 x each)[131] Gasket[140] Hex head screw for grounding outside[1222] Spacer bushing[a] Terminal strip 1[a1] Screw of option terminal / rectifier[b] Terminal strip[b1] Screw option terminal

The type and number of terminal strips varies with the terminal box design and the op-tions.Proceed as follows to turn the terminal box:1. Loosen the screws [123] from the terminal box cover and remove the cover.2. Remove the retaining screws [119] of the terminal box.3. Clean the sealing surfaces at the stator shoulder as well as at the terminal box

lower part and cover.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



4. Check the gaskets [111] and [131] for damage and replace them if necessary.5. Position the terminal box as desired.6. Fasten the terminal box lower part with the screws [119] and the tooth lock wash-

ers with one of the following tightening torques:• EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 motors: 54 Nm

7. Re-connect any removed cables according to the following table:Yellow White Brown Black Red BlueW2/T4 U2/T5 V2/T6 U1/T1 V1/T2 W1/T3

8. Tighten the nuts on the terminal studs with the appropriate "tighteningtorque" (→ 2 46).

WARNINGElectric shock due to damaged cables.Severe or fatal injuries.• When installing the terminal box lower part or the terminal board, make sure the

cables are not crushed or twisted.• Do not use sharp or pointed objects (such as screwdrivers) to align the cables.• When the assembly is complete, perform an insulation test to make sure the

cables were not damaged. See chapter "Extended storage of motors" (→ 2 31).• Observe the correct sequence of the small connection parts. See chapter "Motor

connection via terminal board" (→ 2 68).

9. Fasten the terminal box cover with the screws [123] and lock washers using theappropriate tightening torque, see chapter "Tightening torques" (→ 2 46). Makesure the gasket is seated correctly.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



4.7.2 Tightening torquesThe following table shows all the tightening torques required for this procedure:

Item no. Screw Validity/motors Tighteningtorque

Nm[2] Terminal stud nut M6 stud 3

M8 stud 6

M12 stud 15.5

M16 stud 30

[113] Cap screw for mounting rail in-stallation

EDR..71 – 132, 315, EDRN80 – 132S, 315 5

[117] Hex head screw for groundinginside

EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S 6.5

EDR..160, EDRN132M/L 27.3

EDR..180 – 225 (aluminum), EDRN180 – 225 (aluminum)

27.3

EDR..180 – 225 (gray cast iron), EDRN180 – 225 (gray cast iron)

50

EDE..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 85

[119] Cap screw for terminal box EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S 5

EDR..160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 27.3

EDR..250 – 315, EDNR250 – 315 54

[123] Hex head screw for terminalbox cover

EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S 6.5

EDR..160, EDRN132M/L 11.3

EDR..180 – 225 (aluminum), EDRN180 – 225 (aluminum)

11.3

EDR..180 – 225 (gray cast iron), EDRN180 – 225 (gray cast iron)

27.3

EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 54

[140] Hex head screw for groundingoutside

EDR..71 – 225, EDRN80 – 225 10

EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 15.5

[a1] Screw for option terminal/recti-fier

EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 1.8

[a2] Flat head screw for option ter-minal

EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 1

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationCoating


4.8 CoatingSEW‑EURODRIVE delivers the drives with a painting that complies with the require-ments for preventing electrostatic charging according to IEC 60079-0.

WARNINGRisk of explosion due to electrostatic charge and sparks caused by improper paint-ing.Severe or fatal injuries from explosion.• If the motor is repainted, observe the requirements for painting to avoid electro-

static charge according to IEC 60079‑0.

4.9 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feetThe following figure shows a EDR..280 motor with option /F.A (retrofit feet).

[16]

[1457]

[90]

18014406536422539

[16] Stator [1457] Set screw[90] Foot Remove the paint from the marked sur-

faces.

The tapped holes of the foot mounting surfaces are closed with set screws [1457]. Thecontact surfaces at the feet [90] and stator [16] are painted.1. Remove the set screws [1457]. Only remove the set screws from those threads

into which you will screw in the foot screws [94]. For EDR..250/280, EDRN250/280motors, 4 set screws. For EDRN315 motors, 6 set screws.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationRetrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet


2. Remove the paint from the contact surfaces of the stator [16] (see marking in the"Example illustration EDR..280" above). For EDR..250/280, EDRN250/280 motors,there are 8 surfaces, for DRN315, motors there are 12. SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use a chisel or flat scraper for this purpose.Remove the paint only from those surfaces to which the feet will be mounted.Refer to the illustration "Terminal box positions" below for selecting the contactsurfaces. A thin layer of corrosion protection agent can be applied to the contactsurfaces once the paint has been removed.The possible terminal box positions are shown below:

0° 270° 180°

9007211165643403

3. Remove the paint from the contact surfaces of the feet [90] at the stator [2] (seemarking in the "Example illustration EDR..280" above). SEW‑EURODRIVE recom-mends to use a chisel or flat scraper for this purpose. A thin layer of corrosion pro-tection agent can be applied to the contact surfaces once the paint has been re-moved.

4. Attach the feet [90] to the motor using the screws [94] and washers [93]. The tight-ening torque for the screws [94] must be 410 Nm. The screws are microencapsu-lated. This is why you have to screw in and tighten the screws quickly.

5. If necessary, you can apply paint or corrosion protection at the joint after attachingthe feet [90].

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationRetrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet


4.9.1 Changing the position of the motor feet

[94][93]

[90]

[16]

7741968395

[16] Stator [93] Washer[90] Foot [94] Screw

When re-installing the motor feet in another position, observe the following:• After removing the screws [94], check them for damage, e.g. to the thread.• Remove the used microencapsulation.• Clean the thread of the screws [94].• Apply a high-strength thread locker to the screw threads [94] before inserting the

screws again.• The set screws removed from the new mounting position can be reused for the

bores of the old mounting position. After inserting the set screw [1457] into theopen tapped holes in the stator [16], paint or corrosion protection can be appliedon the bare joining surfaces.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4 Mechanical installationOptions


4.10 Options4.10.1 /HR, /HF Manual brake release

The option manual brake release /HR, /HF is preinstalled and set at the factory forsome brake sizes. If your drive was not delivered with manual brake release and youwish to retrofit it, observe the instructions in chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manualbrake release" (→ 2 181).

/HF Manual brake releaseYou can use the optional lockable /HF manual brake release to continuously mechan-ically release the BE.. brake with a set screw and a releasing lever.On delivery, the set screw is inserted far enough to not fall out and to not affect thebrake performance. The set screw is designed as self-locking with nylon coat. Thisprevents it from unintended turning in or from falling out.Proceed as follows to activate the lockable /HF manual brake release:1. Screw in the set screw until there is no more clearance at the releasing lever.2. Screw in the set screw by 1/4 or 1/2 revolution in order to manually release the

brake.Proceed as follows to loosen the lockable /HF manual brake release:3. Loosen the set screw at least until the floating clearance of the manual brake re-

lease has completely returned, see chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manualbrake release" (→ 2 181).

WARNINGNo brake function due to incorrect brake installation.Severe or fatal injuries.• Only qualified staff may perform work on the brake.• Before startup, make sure that the set screw is not turned in too far.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationOptions


/HR manual brake releaseYou can use the option /HF manual brake release to mechanically release the BE..brake for a short time via a combination of releasing lever and hand lever. It is de-signed with a spring mechanism, so that it reengages automatically.During the assembly the mechanics inside the fan guard is preset at the factory. Ahand lever is included in the delivery that is attached to the stator housing via clamps.Proceed as follows to activate the /HR manual brake release:1. Remove the hand lever from the stator housing.2. Screw the thread of the hand lever completely into the thread of the releasing

lever.3. To release the brake, pull the hand lever in the direction away from the terminal

box. The correct direction to pull the lever is specified by the arrow on the fanguard.

INFORMATIONThe releasing procedure can be performed with usual force application, do not applytoo much force to the lever to avoid damage to the drive.

Proceed as follows to loosen the /HR manual brake release:1. Let go of the lever in actuated state. The lever reengages to the initial position and

the brake is applied.2. Screw out the hand lever and attach it to the stator housing using the clamps.

WARNINGNo brake function due to incorrect brake installation.Severe or fatal injuries.• Only qualified staff may perform work on the brake.• Before startup, make sure that the hand lever has been removed to prevent unin-

tentional brake release during operation.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



4.10.2 Cover for second shaft endSEW‑EURODRIVE delivers motors with the second shaft end option /2W with the keyinserted and secured by transport protection. This transport protection is not suitablefor operation.

WARNINGUnsecured key skidding out of the keyway.Severe or fatal injuries due to flying parts.• Only operate the motor with attached customer output element (e.g. gear unit), or


WARNINGGenerating of sparks due to unsecured key.Severe or fatal injuries from explosion.• Only operate the motor with attached customer output element (e.g. gear unit), or


A cover for the second shaft end is not included in the delivery as standard. It can beordered optionally for EDR..71 – 280, EDRN80 – 280 motors. If no optional cover isselected, the customer must provide a protection cover to ensure a suitable touchguard.

INFORMATIONObserve the impact resistance requirements according to IEC 60079-0 for selectionand mounting the customer-provided cover.

WARNINGRotating shaft end or attachements.Severe or fatal injuries.• Only start the motor with installed protective cover at the second shaft end.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

4Mechanical installationOptions


The following figure shows the dimensions of the optional cover. This is the standardfor EDR..71 – 132 und EDR..250 – 280, EDRN80 – 132S, EDRN250 – 280 motorsand optional for EDR..160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors.

LB/LBS 1) X

[34]

EA

DA

L1

[361]

[4]

18014402029073931

[4] Keyway[34] Tapping screw[361] Safety coverLB/LBS Length of the motor/brakemotor1) Refer to the "AC Motors" catalog for dimensions

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Dimensions

Motors DA EA L1 XEDR.. EDRN.. mm mm mm mmEDR..71 – 11 23 2 91.5

EDR..71 /BE – 88

EDR..80 EDRN80 14 30 2 95.5

EDR..80 /BE EDRN80 /BE 94.5

EDR..90 EDRN90 14 30 2 88.5

EDR..90 /BE EDRN90 /BE 81

EDR..100 EDRN100 14 30 2 87.5

EDR..100 /BE EDRN100 /BE 81

EDR..112 – 132 EDRN112 – 132S 19 40 3.5 125

EDR..112 – 132 /BE EDRN112 – 132S /BE 120.5

EDR..160 EDRN132M/L 28 60 4 193

EDR..160 /BE EDRN132M/L /BE 187

EDR..180 EDRN160 – 180 38 80 4 233

EDR..180 /BE EDRN160 – 180 /BE 236

EDR..200 – 225 EDRN200 – 225 48 110 5 230

EDR..200 – 225 /BE EDRN200 – 225 /BE 246

EDR..250 – 280 EDRN250 – 280 55 110 3 243.5

EDR..250 – 280 /BE EDRN250 – 280 /BE

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationAdditional regulations


5 Electrical installation

WARNINGElectric shock due to incorrect installation.Severe or fatal injuries.• Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 IEC 60947-4-1 for switching the

motor.• When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instruc-

tions in the frequency inverter operating instructions.

5.1 Additional regulations

The generally applicable installation regulations for low-voltage electric equipment(such as DIN IEC 60364, DIN EN 50110) must be complied with when setting up elec-trical machinery.

5.2 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagramsConnect the motor as shown in the wiring connection diagrams provided with the mo-tor. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.

INFORMATIONDo not connect or start up the motor if the wiring diagram is missing.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationCable entries


5.3 Cable entriesThe terminal boxes have metric threaded holes according to EN 50262 or NPTthreaded holes according to ANSI B1.20.1-1983. All bores are equipped with explo-sion-proof closing plugs upon delivery.For a correct cable entry, replace the closing plugs by cable glands with strain reliefthat are certified for use in the respective hazardous location. Select the cable glandaccording to the outer diameter of the cable used. For the tightening torque of thecable entry, refer to the operating/installation instructions or the IECEx Certificate ofConformity of the cable glands. The IP degree of protection of the cable entry must beat least as high as the IP degree of protection of the motor.Only use connection glands with screw heads that fit into the existing countersink.The following table shows the sizes of the flat bottom counter sinking with the corres-ponding screw sizes:

Counter sinking inmm

19 24 30 35 45 56 64 75

Screw fitting M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63

All cable entries that are not required must be sealed off with a closing plug after com-pletion of the installation in order to maintain the degree of protection. A closing plugmay only be replaced with another explosion-proof closing plug.

5.4 Equipotential bondingIn accordance with IEC 60079-14, the unit must be connected to an equipotentialbonding system. A second grounding screw is available for this connection on the out-side of the terminal box. Observe chapter "Improving the grounding (EMC), HFgrounding" (→ 2 59).

5.5 Wiring notesDuring installation observe the safety notes in chapter 2 and 5.

5.5.1 Protecting the brake control system against interferenceBrake cables must always be routed separately from other unshielded power cableswith phased currents to prevent interference with brake control. In particular, powercables with phased currents include:• Output cables from frequency inverters and servo inverters, soft start units and

brake units• Supply cables for braking resistors and similar optionsFor line-operated motors and when using AC and DC circuit cut-off, the connectionbetween the brake rectifier and the external switch contact must be in a differentpower cable that is separate from the motor power supply.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationSpecial aspects for operation with a frequency inverter


5.5.2 Protecting the motor protection devices against interferenceAdhere to the following points to protect motor protection devices bySEW‑EURODRIVE against interference:• You may route separately shielded supply cables together with switched-mode

power cables in one cable.• Do not route unshielded supply cables together with switched-mode power lines in

one cable.

5.5.3 Brake voltage supply via motor terminal boardDirect voltage supply to the brake from the motor terminal board or the KCC terminalstrip of an EDR../EDRN.. motor (equipment protection level c) is only permitted withconstant speed drives.In hoists and hoist-like applications, this type of voltage supply is only permitted withan additional current relay (BSR control), which ensures the quick application of thebrake also when the hoist is moving downward.

INFORMATIONIn variable-speed motors and motors operated with soft start devices, the brakevoltage must not be picked up at the motor terminal board because the voltage thereis not constant.

5.6 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverterWhen motors are powered from inverters, you must observe the wiring instructions is-sued by the inverter manufacturer. It is essential to observe chapter "Operating modesand limit values" (→ 2 85) and the operating instructions of the frequency inverter.If a drive has an earth leakage current higher than AC or DC 10 mA on a line connec-tion, one or more of the following requirements must be met for the protective earthsystem:• The PE must have a minimum cross section over its entire length of 10 mm2 with

copper or 16 mm2with aluminum.• Where the PE has a cross section of less than 10 mm2 with copper or 16 mm2 with

aluminum, a second PE with at least the same cross section is required to thepoint where the PE has a cross section of not less than 10 mm2 with copper or16 mm2 with aluminum.The drive might need to be equipped with a separate connection for a second PE.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationExterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding


5.7 Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF groundingIn addition to the in addition to the interior PE connection, an NF grounding can be in-stalled on the outside of the terminal box for an improved, low-impedance grounding incase of low frequencies. It is installed as standard.The option can be combined with HF grounding.

INFORMATIONAll parts of the LF grounding kit are made from stainless steel.

EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors

[1]

9007207279069579

[1] LF grounding at the terminal box

EDRE160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors

[1]

8026938379

[1] LF grounding at the terminal box

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationImproving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding


5.8 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF groundingFor improved, low-impedance grounding at high frequencies, we recommend usingthe following connections: SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use corrosion-resistantconnecting elements.HF grounding is not installed as standard.The HF grounding option can be combined with LF grounding at the terminal box.If you require LF grounding in addition to HF grounding, you can connect the con-ductor to the same point.The HF grounding option can be ordered as follows:• Completely pre-installed at the factory, or as• "Grounding terminal" kit for customer installation; part numbers listed in the follow-

ing table.

Motors Part number of "Grounding ter-minal" kit

EDRS71 EDRE80, EDRN80

13633953EDRE90, EDRN90

EDRE100M, EDRN100LS

EDRE100L – 132, EDRN100L – 132S13633945EDRE160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225

with aluminum terminal box

INFORMATIONAll parts of the kit are made from stainless steel.

INFORMATIONFor further information regarding the grounding, refer to the SEW‑EURODRIVE pub-lication "Drive Engineering – Practical Implementation, EMC in Drive Engineering".

INFORMATIONIf 2 or more ground straps are used, you have to attach them with a longer screw.The specified tightening torques refer to a strap thickness of t ≤ 3 mm.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationImproving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding


5.8.1 EDRS71, EDRE80, EDRN80 motors with HF (+LF) grounding

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[3]

[5]

8026768011

[1] Use of the pre-cast bore at thestator housing

[4] Ground strap (not included in the deliv-ery)

[2] Serrated lock washer [5] Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 M6 × 16,tightening torque 10 Nm

[3] Disk ISO 7093

5.8.2 EDRE90, EDRN90 motors with HF (+LF) grounding

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[3]

[5]

8026773131



[2] Serrated lock washer [5] Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 M6 × 16,tightening torque 10 Nm

[3] Disk ISO 7093

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationImproving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding


5.8.3 EDRE100M, EDRN100LS motors with HF (+LF) grounding

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[5]

[3]

18014402064551947



[2] Serrated lock washer [5] Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 M6 × 16,tightening torque 10 Nm[3] Disk ISO 7093

5.8.4 EDRE100L – 132, EDRN100L – 132S motors with HF (+LF) grounding

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[5]

[3]

18014402064551947

[1] Use of tapped hole for lifting eyes [4] Ground strap (not included in the deliv-ery)

[2] Serrated lock washer DIN 6798 [5] Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 × 18,tightening torque 10 Nm

[3] Washer ISO 7089/ISO 7090

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationSpecial aspects in switching operation


5.8.5 EDRE160 – 225, EDRN132M – 315 motors with HF (+LF) grounding[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[5]

[3]

9007202821668107

[1] Use of the tapped holes at the terminal box[2] Serrated lock washer DIN 6798[3] Washer ISO 7089/ISO 7090[4] Ground strap (not included in the delivery)[5] • Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 × 18 (with aluminum terminal boxes of

EDRE160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors), tightening torque 10 Nm• Hex head screw ISO 4017 M10 × 25 (with gray cast iron terminal boxes of

EDRE160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors), tightening torque 10 Nm• Hex head screw ISO 4017 M12 x 30 (terminal boxes of EDRN250 – 315 mo-

tors), tightening torque 15.5 Nm

For EDRE160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors with gray cast iron terminal boxes, thegrounding is always pre-installed upon delivery.

5.9 Special aspects in switching operationWhen the motors are used in switching operation, possible interference of theswitchgear must be excluded by ensuring suitable wiring. According to IEC 60204(electrical equipment of machines), motor windings must have interference suppres-sion to protect the numerical or programmable logic controllers. As it is primarilyswitching operations that cause interference, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends in-stalling protective circuitry in the switching devices.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationAmbient conditions during operation


5.10 Ambient conditions during operation

5.10.1 Ambient temperatureThe temperature range of -20 °C to +40 °C must be ensured unless otherwise spe-cified on the nameplate.Motors intended for use in higher or lower ambient temperatures will have the respect-ive designation on the nameplate.If the motors are used at an ambient temperature above +40 °C (max. +60 °C), thecables and cable glands must be suitable for temperatures ≥ 90 °C.Temperatures below -20 °C (max. -40 °C) require anti-condensation heating. In addi-tion, the cables and screw fittings must be selected according to the relevant temper-ature.

5.10.2 Motor power depending on the installation altitudeThe following diagram shows the factor fH by which the motor power is reduced as afunction of the installation altitude.The illustration applies only to EPL "Gc" and "Dc". For EPL "Gb" and "Db" the max-imum installation altitude is 1000 m.

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

fH

H [m]

9007204663584267

The reduction is calculated as follows: PH = fH × PN

The current is calculated as follows: IH = fH × IN

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationAmbient conditions during operation


5.10.3 Hazardous radiationMotors must not be subjected to hazardous radiation (such as ionizing radiation). Con-sult SEW‑EURODRIVE, if necessary.

5.10.4 Hazardous gases, vapors and dustsIf used according to their designated use, explosion-proof motors are incapable of ig-niting explosive gases, vapors or dusts. However, explosion-proof motors may not besubjected to gases, vapors or dusts that endanger operational safety, for examplethrough• Corrosion• Damage to the protective coating• Damage to the sealing material, etc.

Gasket selectionIf the motor is operated in environments with high environmental impact, such as in-creased ozone values, you can equip it with high-quality gaskets. If you have doubtsregarding the stability of the gaskets in connection with the respective environmentalimpacts, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationMotors of design 2G-b, 2D-b, 2GD-b, 3G-c, 3D-c and 3GD-c


5.11 Motors of design 2G-b, 2D-b, 2GD-b, 3G-c, 3D-c and 3GD-cThe EDR../EDRN.. explosion-proof motors by SEW‑EURODRIVE are designed foruse in the following zones:

Design Use/2G-b Can be used in zones 1 and 2

/2D-b Can be used in zones 21 and 22

/2GD-b Can be used in zones 1 and 2, as well as in zone 21 and 22

/3G-c Can be used in zone 2

/3D-c Can be used in zone 22

/3GD-c Can be used in zones 2 and 22

5.11.1 Temperature classesFor the temperature class of the motor in the following designs, refer to the nameplate,or the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC) that can be downloaded underwww.iecex.com.• Designs 3G-c, 3D-c and 3GD-c• Design 2G-b, 2D-b and 2GD-b

5.11.2 Surface temperatureFor the surface temperature of the motor in the following designs, refer to the name-plate, or the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC) that can be downloaded un-der www.iecex.com.• Design 3G-c, 3D-c and 3GD-c• Design 2G-b, 2D-b and 2GD-b

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationNotes regarding the connection of the motor


5.11.3 Protection against excessively high surface temperatures

Protection exclusively with motor protection switchNote the following when installing motors with S1 identification and motor protectionswitch according to IEC 60947:• For designs 2G-b and 2GD-b: With starting current ratio IA/IN listed on the name-

plate, the response time of the motor protection switch must be less than the heat-ing time tE of the motor.

• The motor circuit breaker must disconnect all poles in the event of a phase failure.• The motor protection switch must be approved by a notified body and assigned a

corresponding inspection number.• The motor protection switch must be adjusted to the rated motor current indicated

on the nameplate. With design 2G-b, 2D-b and 2GD-b, the permitted rated currentof the motor is specified on the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC).

Protection exclusively with PTC thermistor (/TF)Motors with S1, S4-50% identification that are equipped with a PTC thermistor: ThePTC thermistor must be evaluated using a suitable device. Observe the applicable in-stallation regulations.

WARNINGDestruction of the temperature sensor, resulting in risk of explosion due to imper-missible heating of the motor.Fatal or serious injuries caused by explosion.• Do not connect a voltages > 30 V.

The PTC thermistors comply with DIN VDE V 0898-1-401.Resistance measurement (measuring instrument with V ≤ 2.5 V or I < 1 mA):• Standard measured values: 20 – 500 Ω, thermal resistance > 4000 ΩThe PTC thermistor (/TF) is required in order to maintain a safe isolation and forthermal monitoring.The evaluation function of the temperature monitoring must be activated in connectionwith the temperature sensor measuring circuit and must become effective in the eventof an overtemperature.

Protection with motor protection switch and additional PTC thermistorThe conditions stated for exclusive protection with motor circuit breaker also applyhere. Protection with PTC thermistors (/TF) only represents a supplementary prevent-ive measure which is irrelevant to certification for potentially explosive atmospheres.

5.12 Notes regarding the connection of the motor

INFORMATIONIt is essential to comply with the valid wiring diagram. Do not connect or start up themotor if this wiring diagram is missing. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams freeof charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE. 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

5Electrical installationNotes regarding the connection of the motor


Observe the following points when you connect the motor:• Check cable cross section• Arrange terminal links correctly• Screw on the connections and the PE conductor correctly• Make sure that the connection cables are not cramped to avoid damage to the

cable insulation.• Observe air gaps, see chapter "Electrical installation"• In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary• Perform the connection in accordance with the enclosed wiring diagram• Avoid protruding wire ends• Observe the specified direction of rotation

WARNINGRisk of explosion due to contaminated terminal box.Severe or fatal injuries.• Seal the terminal box and unused cable entries against dust and humidity.• Remove present foreign objects, dirt and humidity from the terminal box.

The following wiring diagrams can be obtained from SEW‑EURODRIVE by specifyingthe motor order number (see chapter Nameplate):

Motors Number ofpoles

Connec-tion

Corresponding wiring dia-gram

(designation/number)xx = placeholder for version

EDR..71 – EDR..315, EDRN80 – 315

4 m / W C13: 68184xx08R13: 68001xx06

The motors are supplied and connected differently depending on the size and elec-trical design. Comply with the connection type specified in the following table:

Motors ConnectionEDR..71 – EDR..132, EDRN80 – 132S

• With V < 500 V and I < 17 A: Motor connection viacage clamp terminal

• With V > 500 V and I > 17 A: Motor connection via ter-minal board

EDR..160 – EDR..315,EDRN132M – 315

• Motor connection via terminal board

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationMotor connection via terminal board


5.13 Motor connection via terminal board5.13.1 Double-sided supply with high load currents

In case of high load currents, a double-sided supply must be realized for EDR../EDRN250 – 315 motors. This applies to load currents higher than the following values:• M12: 213 A• M16: 280 A

Arrangement of terminal links with m connection

EDR../EDRN250 – 315 motors (double-sided supply):

U1

U2

V2

V1

W1

W2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[6]

(T1)

(T2)

(T3)

(T6)

(T4)

(T5)

9007199734852747

[1] Terminal link [4] Terminal board[2] Terminal studs [6] Customer connection with divided connec-

tion cable[3] Flange nut

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationMotor connection via terminal board


5.13.2 Connection variants via terminal boardThe motors are supplied and connected in different ways depending on the electricaldesign. Arrange the terminal links as shown in the wiring diagram and screw them onfirmly. Observe the tightening torques specified in the following tables:

EDR..71 – EDR..132, EDRN80 – 132S motorsTerminal

studsTightening torque

hex nutCustomer

connectionDesign Connection type Scope of delivery

(small connectionaccessories)

PE terminalstud

Design

Ø Cross section ØM6 3.0 Nm ≤ 6 mm2 1 Ring cable lug/

solid wireEnclosed in

bagM5 4

M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 1 Ring cable lug M5 2

EDR..160, EDRN132M/L motorsTerminal


hex nutCustomer con-

nectionDesign Connection type Scope of delivery


PE terminalstud

Design



bagM8 2

M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 1 Ring cable lug M8 2M8 6.0 Nm ≤ 70 mm2 1 Ring cable lug M10 2

EDR..180 – EDR..225, EDRN160 – 225 motorsTerminal



nectionDesign Connection type Scope of delivery


PE terminalstud

Design



bagM8 2

M8 6.0 Nm ≤ 70 mm2 1 Ring cable lug M8 2M12 15.5 Nm 35 mm2 –

95 mm21 Ring cable lug preassembled M12 2

EDR..250 – EDR..315, EDRN250 – 315 motorsTerminal



nectionDesign Connection type Scope of delivery PE terminal

studDesign

Ø Cross section ØM12 15.5 Nm 35 mm2 –

95 mm21 Ring cable lug preassembled M12 2

M16 30 Nm 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Enclosed in bag

M12 2

The designs in bold print apply to S1 duty cycle for the standard voltages and stand-ard frequencies according to the data in the catalog. Other designs may have differentconnections, for example, different terminal stud diameters and/or a different scope ofdelivery.

WARNINGRisk of explosion due to incorrect tubular cable lugs.Severe or fatal injuries.• Do not use tubular cable lugs according to DIN 46235, as the air gaps may be

less than the minimum permitted values.• Use tubular cable lugs according to DIN 46234 and DIN 46237.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Variant 1The following figure shows the 2 possible customer connections:

Customer connection with ring cable lug:

[2]

[1]

[8]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[6a]

[9][10]

9007203244266635

Customer connection with solid wire:

[2]

[1]

[7]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[6b]

[8]

[9][10]

18014401143876491

[1] Washer [6b] Winding connection with solid wire, U-shaped

[2] Serrated lock washer [7] Serrated lock washer[3] Winding connection with

ring cable lug[8] Top nut

[4] Bottom nut [9] Terminal studs[5] Serrated lock washer [10] Anti-twist frame to secure the air gaps

(not with M16 terminal stud)[6a] Winding connection with ringcable lug, e.g. according toDIN 46237 or DIN 46234.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationMotor connection via terminal board


Variant 2The following figure shows the design for PE connection:

[1]

[1]

[5]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[6]

[2]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[6]

18014401330284043

[1] Hex nut [4] Serrated lock washer[2] Washer [5] Stud[3] PE conductor with cable lug [6] Terminal box

Variant 3

[5]

[7]

[6]

[2][1]

[3]

[4]

[8]

9007199454382091

[1] External connection with ring cablelug, according to DIN 46237 orDIN 46234, for example

[5] Terminal link

[2] Terminal stud [6] Bottom nut[3] Upper nut [7] Winding connection with ring cable lug[4] Washer [8] Serrated lock washer

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Variant 4

[4]

[5]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[3]

[1]

18014399649088651

[1] Terminal box [4] Lock washer[2] Terminal clip [5] Hex head screw[3] PE conductor

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationConnecting the motor via terminal strip


5.14 Connecting the motor via terminal strip

5.14.1 KCC terminal strip• In accordance with the wiring diagram provided• Check the max cable cross section:

– 4 mm2, rigid– 4 mm2, flexible– 2.5 mm2, flexible with conductor end sleeve

• In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary• Strip 10 – 12 mm of insulation

Arrangement of terminal links for W connection

18014399506064139

Arrangement of terminal links for m connection

18014399506066059

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationConnecting the brake


5.15 Connecting the brakeThe BE.. brakes are powered by energized DC voltage and are released electrically.The brake is applied mechanically when the voltage supply is disconnected.

WARNINGDelayed brake application or unintentional brake release due to incorrect control orconnection.Severe or fatal injuries, e.g. due to falling hoist.• Comply with the applicable regulations issued by the relevant employer's liability

insurance association regarding phase failure protection and the associated cir-cuit/circuit modification.

• Connect the brake according to the enclosed wiring diagram.• In case of emergency off, always disconnect al poles of the brake control from

the supply voltage.• Only use suitable contactors with sufficient contact rating (utilization category ac-

cording to IEC 60947-4-1/IEC 60947-5-1, see Brake voltage supply).• For contactor selection, observe the inductive load to switch, and the high current

load while switching the brake.

5.15.1 Connecting the brake controlThe brake is powered by a brake control system with protection circuit. For category3D-c, the brake control can either be installed in the motor's terminal box or in the con-trol cabinet. For category 3G-c, 3GD-c, the control must be located in the control cab-inet. When the motor is prepared for the brake control in the control cabinet, the brakesupply cables are connected to a terminal strip in the motor terminal box.Usually screw terminals are used as terminals on the brake control. The terminal stripis designed with cage clamps.The connectable cable cross sections are restricted to 2.5 mm2. In case you use lar-ger cable cross sections due to application reasons, additional intermediate terminalsmust be used.The brake is internally connected to the motor PE. An additional connection for thebrake is not necessary.

WARNINGDelayed brake application or unintentional brake release due to incorrect control orconnection.Severe or fatal injuries, e.g. due to falling hoist.• Observe the specifications of this documentation for connecting the brake.• If you are uncertain about brake control, voltage supply type and design, or over-

voltage and short circuit protection, contact the plant manufacturer orSEW‑EURODRIVE.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationConnecting the brake


5.15.2 Permitted brake controls

INFORMATIONThe following specifications refer to motors designed for operation at ambient tem-peratures of -20 °C to +40 °C, and with thermal class 130 (B) or 155 (F). Deviationsmay occur depending in the installed motor options.For each individual case always observe the specifications on the order confirmationand on the motor Nameplate.

The brake is designed for operation with AC voltage or DC voltage, depending on thedesign. A brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE is used that is either installed in the mo-tor terminal box (design 3D-c) or in the control cabinet (design 3G-c, 3GD-c).BE05 – 2 brakes can also be operated without brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVEwith DC voltage. Observe the information on the "Nameplate" (→ 2 22) of the motor.In this case, a suitable overvoltage protection must be installed at the terminal strips inthe terminal box using varistors. The varistors are not included in the delivery of themotor.The following brake control types are not permitted:• Operation with AC voltage without brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE with

BE05 – BE122 brakes.• Operation with DC voltage without brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE with BE5 –

BE122 brakes.• Operation with third-party brake control.For an overview of available brake controls by SEW‑EURODRIVE and of the technicaldata, refer to chapter "Brake control" (→ 2 198).

5.15.3 Optional separation of DC and AC circuitsIn case of brakes operated with AC voltage, make sure the disconnection type desig-nated by the manufacturer is applied correctly during the brake connection. The fol-lowing types are distinguished:• Cut-off in the AC circuit with normal application time• Cut-off in AC circuit and DC circuit with shortened application timeThe correct switch-off type must be ensured by a respective wiring. Certain brake con-trols by SEW-EURODRIVE realize the same AC and DC cut-off via integrated switch-ing relays (e.g. BMP1.5), or via mounted relays (e.g. BSR or BUR for design 3D-c).The switch-off type is specified on the included wiring diagrams by a pictogram.

WARNINGDelayed brake application or unintentional ongoing brake release due to incorrectswitch-off.Severe or fatal injuries, e.g. due to falling hoist.• Only use the faster cut-off in the DC and AC circuit for hoists and hoist-like ap-

plications.• When you are not sure if your application is a hoist-like application, contact

SEW‑EURODRIVE.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationConnecting the brake


5.15.4 Brake voltage supplyIn general, the brake voltage supply must match the values specified on the motorNameplate. The brake must be supplied via the designated brake control.The specifications on the nameplate have a tolerance of ± 5% of the stated nominalvalue, or of the mean value of the stated connection range. Observer order-specificdeviations.Make sure the voltage supply is sufficiently stable by using cable cross sections andvoltage sources that are dimensioned accordingly. Make sure the supply voltage doesnot drop below 90 % of the nominal value during the starting procedure. This may becaused by an increased inrush current see chapter Operating currents.In case of single-speed drives of category 3D-c with brake control in the terminal boxthat are operated directly at the supply system (meaning without frequency inverter orsoft start devices), the brake supply voltage can also be taken from the terminal boardof the motor. Adhere to the following restrictions:• The nominal brake voltage must either match the phase-to-neutral voltage, or the

phase-to-phase voltage of the motor (observe nameplate and motor switchingtype).

• In case of hoists or hoist-like applications the BSR brake control must be used forcut-off in the DC and AC circuits.

• For combinations with BMP3.1 brake control (BE60 – 122) a voltage supply via theterminal board is not permitted.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationConnecting the brake


5.15.5 Switching equipmentThe high current utilization during switching the brake (inductive load) requires suit-able contactors/switch contacts, to obtain the correct function of the brake.Depending on brake type and type design, the switch contacts must meet the specific-ations in the following utilization categories:• Switch contacts for the supply voltage at AC voltage operation: AC-3 according to

IEC 60947-4-1 or AC-15 according to IEC 60947-5-1.• Switch contact for the supply voltage at DC voltage operation: Preferably AC-3 or

DC-3 according to IEC 60947-4-1. As an alternative, contacts in utilization cat-egory DC-13 according to IEC 60947-5-1 are also permitted.

• Switch contacts for optional separation on DC side: AC-3 according toIEC 60947-4-1.

Observe the specifications on the provided wiring diagram.Using a semi-conductor relay is not permitted.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5 Electrical installationOptions


5.16 OptionsConnect options as shown in the wiring diagram(s) provided with the motor. Do notconnect any options if the wiring diagram is missing. You can obtain the valid wiringdiagrams free of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.The following options are not available for every equipment protection level/EPL, seethe following table:

Option EPL Gb, Db EPL Gc, DcTemperature sensor /TF x x

Temperature detection /KY x x

/PK temperature detection x x

Temperature detection /PT x x

Forced cooling fan /VE – x

Add-on encoder – x

Anti-condensation heating x x

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

5Electrical installationOptions


5.16.1 Temperature sensor /TF

WARNINGExplosion caused by impermissible heating of the motor due to defective temperat-ure sensor /TF.Severe or fatal injuries.• Do not connect any voltages > 30 V to the temperature sensor /TF.• Observe the provided wiring diagram for the connection of the temperature

sensor /TF.

The PTC thermistors comply with DIN VDE V 0898-1-401.Resistance measurement (measuring instrument with V ≤ 2.5 V or I < 1 mA):• Standard measured values: 20 – 500 Ω, thermal resistance > 4000 ΩWhen using the temperature sensor for thermal monitoring, the evaluation functionmust be activated to maintain reliable isolation of the temperature sensor circuit. Thethermal protection function must become active in case of overtemperature.If there is a second terminal box for the temperature sensor /TF, this is where youmust connect the temperature sensor.Observe the provided wiring diagram for the connection of the TF temperature sensor.If the wiring diagram is missing, you can obtain it from SEW-EURODRIVE free ofcharge.The following figure shows the characteristic curve of the /TF with reference to thenominal response temperature (referred to as TNF).

4000

1330

550

250

-20

°C

[T]

TNF

TN

F -

20 K

TN

F +

15 K

TN

F -

5 K

TN

F +

5 K

R [Ω]

5470153483

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



5.16.2 Temperature detection /KY (KTY84 – 130)

NOTICEExcessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of thetemperature detection as well as the motor winding.The drive system might be damaged.• Use currents > 3 mA in the KTY circuit.• Observe the correct connection of the KTY to ensure correct evaluation of the

temperature detection.• Observe the polarity during connection.

The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject tothe motor temperature with a measuring current of 2 mA and correct pole connection:

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 -250 300 350

T [°C]

R [Ω]

1140975115

Technical Data KTY84 – 130Connection Red (+)

Blue (−)

Total resistance at 20 – 25 °C 540 Ω < R < 640 Ω

Test current < 3 mA23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017



5.16.3 Temperature detection /PK (PT1000)

NOTICEExcessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of thetemperature detection as well as the motor winding.The drive system might be damaged.• Avoid currents > 3 mA in the circuit of the PT1000.• Observe the correct connection of the PT1000 to ensure correct evaluation of the

temperature detection.

The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject tothe motor temperature.

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250

T [°C]

R [Ω]

17535480203

Technical Data PT1000Connection Black/red

Resistance at 20 – 25 °C per PT1000 1077 Ω < R < 1098 Ω

Test current < 3 mA

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



5.16.4 Temperature sensor /PT (PT100)

NOTICEExcessive self-heating of the temperature detection can damage the insulation ofthe temperature detection as well as the motor winding.The drive system might be damaged.• Avoid currents > 3 mA in the circuit of the PT100.• Observe the correct connection of the PT100 to ensure correct evaluation of the

temperature detection.

The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject tothe motor temperature.

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250

T [°C]

R [Ω]

1145838347

Technical Data PT100Connection Red/white

Resistance at 20 – 25 °C per PT100 107.8 Ω < R < 109.7 Ω

Test current < 3 mA

5.16.5 Forced cooling fan /VEMotors can be equipped with a forced cooling fan as an option. For information onconnection and safe operation, refer to chapter "Operation and maintenance instruc-tions for forced cooling fan /VE".

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



5.16.6 Overview of add-on encodersRefer to the wiring connection diagrams on information on how to connect incrementalencoders:

En-coder

Motors Encodertype

Mounting type Power sup-ply

Signal Wiring dia-gram

DC VES7S EDR..71 – 132,

EDRN80 – 132SIncremental Shaft-centered 7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08

ES7R EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S

Incremental Shaft-centered 7 to 30 TTL (RS-422) 68179xx08

ES7C EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S

Incremental Shaft-centered 4.75 to 30 HTL/TTL (RS-422)

68179xx08

AS7W EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S

Absolutevalue

Shaft-centered 7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos(RS485)

68181xx08

AS7Y EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S

Absolutevalue

Shaft-centered 7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos +SSI

68182xx07

EG7S EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280

Incremental Shaft-centered 7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08

EG7R EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280

Incremental Shaft-centered 7 to 30 TTL (RS-422) 68179xx08

EG7C EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280

Incremental Shaft-centered 4.75 to 30 HTL/TTL (RS-422)

68179xx08

AG7W EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280

Absolutevalue

Shaft-centered 7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos(RS485)

68181xx08

AG7Y EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280

Absolutevalue

Shaft-centered 7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos +SSI

68182xx07

EH7C EDR../EDRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 10 to 30 HTL 08511xx08

EH7R EDR../EDRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 10 to 30 TTL (RS-422) 08511xx08

EH7S EDR../EDRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 10 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos 08511xx08

EH7T EDR../EDRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 5 (±5%) TTL (RS-422) 08511xx08

AH7Y EDR../EDRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 9 to 30 TTL+SSI(RS-422)

08259xx07

EV7C EDR..71 – 280EDRN80 – 280

Incremental Flangecentered

4.75 to 30 HTL/TTL (RS-422)

68179xx08

EV7R EDR..71 – 280EDRN80 – 280


7 to 30 TTL (RS-422) 68179xx08

EV7S EDR..71 – 280EDRN80 – 280


7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08

AV7W EDR..71 – 280EDRN80 – 280

Absolutevalue

Flangecentered

7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos(RS485)

68181xx08

AV7Y EDR..71 – 280EDRN80 – 280

Absolutevalue

Flangecentered

7 to 30 1 Vss sin/cos +SSI

68182xx07

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Encoder connectionWhen connecting the encoders to the inverters, observe the provided wiring diagramsand the information in these operating instructions as well as the operating instruc-tions / wiring diagrams of the respective inverter and the operating instructions/wiringdiagrams provided with the third-party encoder if applicable. See"Appendix" (→ 2 230)for the wiring diagram.• Maximum line length (inverter to encoder):

– 100 m with a capacitance per unit length conductor – shield ≤ 110 nF/km– 100 m with a capacitance per unit length conductor – conductor ≤ 85 nF/km

• Core cross-section: 0.20 – 0.5 mm2, recommendation ≥ 0.25 mm2

• Use shielded cable with twisted pair conductors and apply shield over large areaon both ends:– In the cable gland of the encoder connection cover or in the encoder connector– To the inverter on the electronics shield clamp or to the housing of the sub D

plug• Install the encoder cables separately from the power cables, maintaining a dis-

tance of at least 200 mm.• Compare the operating voltage with the permitted operating voltage range on the

encoder nameplate. Deviations in the operating voltage may overheat and damagethe encoder.

• Observe the clamping area of 5 to 10 mm of the cable gland of the connectioncover. If you use cables with a different cross section, you have to replace theprovided cable gland with a suitable other cable gland.

• The cable glands for the cable entry must meet the following conditions:– Cramping area is suitable for the used cable(s)– The IP degree of protection of the encoder connection is at least as high as the

IP degree of protection of the actual encoder– Use is permitted according to the assignment to EPL/zone– The operating temperature range matches the designated ambient temperature

range.• Check the flawless state and the proper seat of the connection cover gasket.• Tighten the screws of the connection cover with a tightening torque of 2 Nm.

5.16.7 Anti-condensation heating /HxIf explosion-proof motors are operated at ambient temperatures below -20 °C, the useof an anti-condensation heating is required.Anti-condensation heating can optionally be used for applications operated at ambienttemperatures above -20 °C where moisture condensation is expected.The strip heaters are controlled according to the following principle:• Motor switched off → anti-condensation heating activated• Motor switched on → anti-condensation heating deactivatedObserve the permitted voltage according to the nameplate and the enclosed terminalassignment diagram.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesPermitted operating modes


6 Operating modes and limit values6.1 Permitted operating modes

6.1.1 Permitted operating modes and protection concept for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"

Design Operatingmode

acc. to name-plate

Additionalnameplate

for fre-quency in-

verter

Permitted operating

modes

Protection against

excessive heating

Identification onthe

nameplate

2G-b2D-b2GD-b

S1 – Line operation:S1

Motor circuitbreaker1)

Time tE and relation IA/IN

2D-b: without tE time

S1 VFC Frequency in-verter operation

PTC thermistor2) +speed-dependentcurrent limiting inthe frequency in-

verter3)

Additional nameplatefor frequency in-

verter: X identifica-tion and permitted

continuous currentslisted depending on

the frequency

VFC Line operation:S1


Time tE and relation IA/IN

2D-b: without tE time

S1, S4 50% – Line operation: S1, S4 50%

PTC thermistor2) tA time, PTCDIN VDE V

0898-1-401, relayfunctionally testedaccording to II(2)G

1) Monitoring device for protecting explosion-proof drives (e.g. Directive 2014/34/EU)2) Catalog designation for PTC thermistor is "TF". Monitoring of the PTC thermistor by a thermistor monitoring device for protecting ex-

plosion-proof drives (e.g. Directive 2014/34/EU)3) The frequency inverter must comply with the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesPermitted operating modes


6.1.2 Permitted operating modes and protection concept for motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"

Design Operatingmode

acc. to name-plate

Additionalnameplate

for fre-quency in-

verter

Permitted operating

modes

Protection against

excessive heating

Identification onthe

nameplate

3G-c3D-c3GD-c

S1 – Line operation:S1


–

S1 – Line operation:Switching opera-tion, soft starter,heavy starting

PTC thermistor2) Type designation /TF

VFC Frequency in-verter operation,group drive (only

for 3D-c)

PTC thermistor2) Additional nameplatefor frequency in-verter: Permitted


the frequency

S1 VFC Line operation:Switching opera-tion, soft starter,heavy starting

PTC thermistor2) Additional nameplatefor frequency in-verter: Permitted


the frequency1) Monitoring device for protecting explosion-proof drives (e.g. Directive 2014/34/EU)2) Catalog designation for PTC thermistor is /TF. Monitoring of the PTC thermistor by a thermistor "monitoring device for protecting ex-

plosion-proof drives" (e.g. Directive 2014/34/EU)

INFORMATIONAll motors must be protected from impermissible heating according to IEC 60079-14.Safety equipment required for safe operation is affected by these standards and mustbe certified for this reason.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesLine operation


6.2 Line operation6.2.1 Motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"

Continuous dutyMotors with EPL "Gb" and "Db" are dimensioned for continuous duty (S1). This in-cludes start-up with low load and start-ups that are not performed often, where hardlyany additional heat is created, and that are monitored via a current-controlled, delayedprotection device.A "monitoring device for protecting explosion-proof drives" (e.g. Directive 2014/34/EU)prevents overheating.

Switching operationMotors with EPL "Gb" and "Db" marked with S1, S4-50% may be operated in operat-ing mode S1 and S4-50%.Operating mode S4 considers start-up and load changes. Operating mode S4 is ex-tended by the relative cyclic duration factor (cdf), the mass moment of inertia of themotor (JM) and mass moment of inertia of the load (Jext). Both mass moments of inertiarefer to the motor shaft and are also specified on the nameplate.For the calculation of the permitted cycles per hour, use the formula for calculating thestarting frequency in chapter "Calculating the starting frequency" (→ 2 88). The per-mitted no-load starting frequency (Z0) required for the calculation, and referring to 50%cdf, is specified in the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC).PTC thermistors (/TF) are the only measure to prevent overheating.

6.2.2 Motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"

Continuous dutyMotors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc" are always marked with S1.A "monitoring device for protecting explosion-proof drives" (e.g. Directive 2014/34/EU)prevents overheating.

Switching operationIn case of switching frequencies that are assigned to operating modes S3, S4 and S6,the load changes must be considered in addition to start-up. This is ensured by calcu-lating the permitted switching frequency. For this calculation, use the formula for cal-culating the starting frequency in chapter "Calculating the starting fre-quency" (→ 2 88).A PTC thermistor /TF prevents overheating.

Notes on the brake In line operation, the brake is applied at nominal speed of the motor when the drive isswitched off or in case of an emergency off. The braking work may not exceed thespecified maximum braking work per braking operation.Brakemotors are generally equipped with a temperature sensor /TF.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesLine operation


6.2.3 Calculating the starting frequencyYou can determine the permitted starting frequency Z of the motor in cycles/hour us-ing the following formula:Z = Z0× KJ× KM× KP

You can determine the factors KJ, KM, and KP using the following diagrams:

Depending on the additional moment of iner-

tia

Depending on the counter-torque at startup

Depending on the staticpower and the cyclic dura-

tion factor (cdf)

9007203235222027

JX Total of all external mass moments of inertia in relation to the motor axis

MH Acceleration torque of the motor

JZ Mass moment of inertia flywheel fan Pstat Power demand after start-up (staticpower)

JM Mass moment of inertia of the motor PN Rated motor powerML Counter-torque during startup % cdf Relative cyclic duration factor

Z0 is the no-load starting frequency defined by the manufacturer.The permitted starting frequency Z of a motor is calculated using the formula for calcu-lating the starting frequency. Z0 indicates the number of times per hour that the motorcan accelerate the mass moment of inertia of its rotor up to nominal speed withoutcounter-torque.

6.2.4 Soft starter/soft start unitsSoft start devices are permitted for motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc" when the motorsare equipped with a TF temperature sensor and meet the requirements ofIEC 60079-14. During startup, you must verify and document whether temperaturemonitoring is effective and whether the motor starts up correctly. The motor must bedisconnected from the supply system when the protection device trips.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesFrequency inverter operation


6.3 Frequency inverter operation6.3.1 Permitted voltage requirement in FI operation

Operating motors from SEW‑EURODRIVE on frequency inverters is permitted if thepulse voltages at the motor terminals indicated in the following figure are not ex-ceeded:

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

[A]

[B]

0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 1,2 1,4

[1]

18014401516651787

[A] Permitted pulse voltage ULL in V[B] Rise time in µs[1] Permitted pulse voltage for EDR../EDRN.. motors

INFORMATIONThe permitted maximum PE voltage of 1200 V must not be exceeded in IT systemoperation even in the event of an error.

INFORMATIONIf the permitted pulse voltage is exceeded, you have to provide for according meas-ures to limit it. Consult the manufacturer of the frequency inverter.

INFORMATIONThe maximum permitted nominal motor voltage for frequency inverter operation is500 V.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesFrequency inverter operation


SEW-EURODRIVE frequency invertersWhen using frequency inverters from SEW‑EURODRIVE at line voltages of up to500 V and in non-regenerative operation, the maximally permitted limit values of themotors are met.The pulse voltage at the motor terminals (caused by reflections) depends among oth-ers on the level of the DC link voltage and the cable length between frequency inverterand motor.If regenerative operation cannot be ruled out, a braking resistance must be configuredand connected to the frequency inverter to avoid an increased DC link voltage.

Energy recovery

The regenerative power supply module of MOVIDRIVE® or MOVIAXIS® can be usedwith the necessary options without restrictions. The regenerative power supply unitprevents high DC link voltages and ensures that the limit values are not exceeded.

Frequency inverters from third party manufacturersIf the maximum permitted limit values cannot be met with frequency inverters fromother manufacturers, you must take limiting measures. Contact the manufacturer ofthe frequency inverter for more information.

IT systemIn an IT system, an insulation fault between a phase and ground is tolerated. Theground fault on the motor could mean that the maximum permitted limit value forphase/ground of 1200 V is exceeded in regenerative operation. To prevent this effect-ively, you have to install suitable protection elements between the frequency inverterand the motor. Usually, sine filters are installed between the frequency inverter andmotor in this case. For detailed information about component selection and wiring,please contact the manufacturer of the frequency inverter.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesSafe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"


6.4 Safe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"Project planning is the basic requirement for safe operation of explosion-proof motors.The following points have to be considered:• Checking the conditions of the typical application• With deviations from the typical application: Calculating the motor terminal voltage• Adhere to the thermal torque limit characteristic curve• Observe the dynamic limit torque• Observe motor limit frequency• Select the suitable frequency inverter• Using a braking resistor if regenerative operation cannot be ruled out completely• Check the overhung and axial loads on the motor shaft of stand-alone motors• Observe the maximum gear unit input speed, see nemax on the nameplate• Observe the maximum gear unit output torque, see Mamax on the nameplate

6.4.1 Motor terminal voltageThe calculation of the motor terminal voltage is an important component of projectplanning.If the conditions differ from the typical application, you have to calculate the start of thefield weakening fD* and the torque ME*, see also chapter Special application.

6.4.2 Maximum permitted torquesThe thermal torque limit characteristic curve shows the permitted maximum torque forcontinuous operation.The values may be exceeded for brief periods if the effective operating point lies be-low the thermal limit characteristic curve.The permitted maximum dynamic limit torque is determined by the short-term currentlimitation (150% IN motor). The value IN motor is listed on the IECEx Certificate of Conform-ity (IECEx CoC) or the nameplate.

6.4.3 Maximum and minimum permitted frequenciesThe maximum and minimum frequencies are indicated on the nameplate. The actualvalues may not exceed or fall below these specifications.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesSafe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"


6.4.4 Motor/inverter assignment for motors of design 2G-b, 2D-b and 2GD-bMOVITRAC® B can be used for the basic control range and for the field weakeningrange.MOVIDRIVE® B is only suitable for the basic control range. This means the maximumspeed parameter must be limited to the beginning of the field weakening range.Only use frequency inverters which meet the requirements listed in the IECEx Certific-ate of Conformity (IECEx CoC).Combinations for motor voltages other than 230/400 V can be requested fromSEW‑EURODRIVE.

INFORMATIONThe speed can be reduced in case of gearmotors. If in doubt, refer to the nameplatefor the permitted values.

EDR.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors2G-b, 2GD-b

PN IN nmax Inverter powerkW A 1/min kW

0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5EDRS71S4 0.25 0.78 2385 x – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.2 2110 o x o o – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 1.38 2410 o o x o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0,55 1.33 2500 o o x o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 1.8 2465 – o o x o – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.1 2.55 2455 – – o o x o – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.5 3.5 2395 – – – – o x o o – – –EDRE100M4 2.2 4.9 2455 – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE100L4 2,2 5.2 2470 – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE100LC4 3 6.4 2480 – – – – – – o x o o –EDRE112M4 3 6.4 1695 – – – – – – o x o o –EDRE132S4 4 8.1 1730 – – – – – – – o x o oEDRE132M4 5.5 11.5 1685 – – – – – – – – o x o

Motors2G-b, 2GD-b


5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110EDRE160S4 7.5 15.4 1730 o x o – – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.2 20 1755 – o x o – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11 22 2325 – o x o – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15 29.5 2325 – – o x o – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.5 36 2325 – – – o x o – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22 45 2365 – – – o x o o o – – – –EDRE225S4 30 58.5 2365 – – – – o x o o o – – –EDRE 225M4 37 71.5 2065 – – – – – o x o o o – –

x = recommended o = permitted – = not permitted

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDR.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors2G-b, 2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15EDRS71S4 0.25 1.35 2510 o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 2.1 2465 – o o x o o – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 2.4 2525 – – o x o o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0,55 2.4 2540 – – o x o o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 3.1 2535 – – – o o x o – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.1 4.4 2530 – – – – o o x o – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.5 6 2535 – – – – – – o x o – – – –EDRE100M4 2.2 8.5 2530 – – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE100L4 2.2 9 2540 – – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE100LC4 3 11.1 2555 – – – – – – – – o x o – –EDRE112M4 3 11.1 1740 – – – – – – – – o x o – –EDRE132S4 4 14 1760 – – – – – – – – – o x o –EDRE132M4 5.5 19.9 1730 – – – – – – – – – – o x o

Motors2G-b, 2GD-b


11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110EDRE160S4 7.5 26.6 1750 o x o – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.2 34.6 1760 – o x o – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11 38 2340 – o x o o – – – – –EDRE180M4 15 51 2330 – – o x o o – – – –EDRE180L4 18.5 62.3 2340 – – o o x o o – – –EDRE200L4 22 77.9 2375 – – – o o x o o – –EDRE225S4 30 101.2 2375 – – – – o o x o o oEDRE225M4 37 123.7 2075 – – – – – o o x o o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors2G-b, 2D-b,2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5EDRN80M4 0.75 1.8 2297 – o o x o – – – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 2.6 2326 – – o o x o – – – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 3.5 2331 – – – – o x o o – – –EDRN100LS4 2.2 4.9 2311 – – – – – o x o o – –EDRN100L4 3 6.6 2320 – – – – – – o x o o –EDRN112M4 4 8.4 1802 – – – – – – – o x o oEDRN132S4 5.5 10.7 1802 – – – – – – – – o x oEDRN132M4 7.5 15.3 1817 – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN132L4 9.2 19.9 1820 – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN160M41) 10 19.3 2352 – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN160M42) 11 21 2351 – – – – – – – – – – o1) only design 2G-b2) only design 2D-b

Motors2G-b, 2D-b,2GD-b


11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN132M4 7.5 15.3 1817 o – – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132L4 9.2 19.9 1820 x o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M41) 10 19.3 2352 x o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M42) 11 21 2351 x o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L41) 13.5 26 2350 o x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L42) 15 29 2352 o x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180M41) 15 28 2064 o x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180M42) 18.5 34.5 2066 – o x o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L41) 17.5 31 2064 o x o o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L42) 22 39 2063 – o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN200L41) 24 45.5 2069 – o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN200L42) 30 57 2069 – – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRN225S42) 37 65 1776 – – o o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN225M42) 45 82 1776 – – – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRN250M41) 30 59 1778 – – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRN250M42) 55 108 1778 – – – – – o x o o o – – – –EDRN280S41) 36 69 1775 – – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN280S42) 75 144 1776 – – – – – – o x o o o – – –EDRN280M41) 44 84 1771 – – – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRN280M42) 90 164 1774 – – – – – – – o x o o o – –EDRN315S41) 58 102 1791 – – – – o o x o o o – – – –EDRN315S41) 70 123 1788 – – – – – o o x o o – – – –EDRN315M41) 84 148 1781 – – – – – – o o x o o – – –EDRN315H41) 110 208 1784 – – – – – – – – o x o o o –EDRN315S42) 110 190 1780 – – – – – – – – o x o o o –EDRN315M42) 132 233 1780 – – – – – – – – o o x o o –EDRN315L42) 160 277 1780 – – – – – – – – – o o x o oEDRN315H42) 200 358 1780 – – – – – – – – – – – o x o1) only design 2G-b2) only design 2D-b


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors2G-b, 2D-b,2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22EDRN80M4 0.75 3.1 2352 – – – o o X o – – – – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 4.5 2346 – – – – – o X o – – – – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 6.1 2351 – – – – – – o X o – – – – –EDRN100LS4 2.2 8.5 2331 – – – – – – – o X o o – – –EDRN100L4 3 11.4 2340 – – – – – – – – o X o – – –EDRN112M4 4 14.5 1822 – – – – – – – – – o X o – –EDRN132S4 5.5 18.5 1822 – – – – – – – – – – o X o –EDRN132M4 7.5 26.5 1837 – – – – – – – – – – – o X o



11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN132L4 9.2 34.4 1840 – o X o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M41) 10 33.4 2372 o o X o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M42) 11 36.3 2371 – o X o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L41) 13.5 45 2370 – o X o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN160L42) 15 50.2 2372 – – o X o o – – – – – – – –EDRN180M41) 15 48.4 2084 – – o X o o – – – – – – – –EDRN180M42) 18.5 59.7 2086 – – o X o o o – – – – – – –EDRN180L41) 17.5 53.6 2081 – – o X o o o – – – – – – –EDRN180L42) 22 67.5 2081 – – – o X o o o – – – – – –EDRN200L41) 24 78.7 2085 – – – o o X o o – – – – – –EDRN200L42) 30 98.6 2084 – – – – o o X o o – – – – –EDRN225S42) 37 112 1776 – – – – – o o X o o – – – –EDRN225M42) 45 142 1776 – – – – – – o o X o o – – –EDRN250M41) 30 102 1778 – – – – o o X o o o – – – –EDRN250M42) 55 187 1778 – – – – – – – – o X o o – –EDRN280S41) 36 119 1775 – – – – – o o X o o – – – –EDRN280S42) 75 249 1776 – – – – – – – – – o X o o oEDRN280M41) 44 145 1771 – – – – – – o o X o o – – –EDRN280M42) 90 284 1774 – – – – – – – – – o o X o oEDRN315S41) 58 176 1791 – – – – – – – o o X o o – –EDRN315S41) 70 213 1788 – – – – – – – – o o X o o –EDRN315M41) 84 256 1781 – – – – – – – – – o o X o oEDRN315H41) 110 360 1784 – – – – – – – – – – – o X oEDRN315S42) 110 329 1780 – – – – – – – – o X o o o –EDRN315M42) 132 403 1780 – – – – – – – – o o X o o –EDRN315L42) 160 479 1780 – – – – – – – – – o o X o oEDRN315H42) 200 619 1780 – – – – – – – – – – – o X o1) only design 2G-b2) only design 2D-b


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDR.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 Hz.Motors2G-b, 2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5EDRS71S4 0.25 0.91 2405 x o – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.10 2160 o x o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 1.40 2515 o o x o – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 1.43 2430 – o x o – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 1.85 2475 – o o x o – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 2.70 2470 – – o o x o – – – –EDRE90L4 1.50 3.65 2415 – – – – o x o o – –EDRE100L4 2.20 5.40 2512 – – – – – o x o o –EDRE100LC4 3.00 6.80 2490 – – – – – – o x o oEDRE112M4 3.00 6.70 1725 – – – – – – o x o oEDRE132S4 4.00 8.80 1750 – – – – – – – o x oEDRE132M4 5.50 11.90 1725 – – – – – – – – o xEDRE160S4 7.50 16.20 1740 – – – – – – – – – oEDRE160M4 9.20 20.00 1755 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 23.00 1770 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 31.00 2325 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 37.50 2323 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 45.50 2365 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225S4 30.00 61.00 1770 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225M4 37.00 76.00 1770 – – – – – – – – – –

Motors2G-b, 2GD-b


7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110EDRS71S4 0.25 0.91 2405 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.10 2160 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 1.40 2515 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 1.43 2430 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 1.85 2475 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 2.70 2470 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.50 3.65 2415 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100L4 2.20 5.40 2512 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100LC4 3.00 6.80 2490 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE112M4 3.00 6.70 1725 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE132S4 4.00 8.80 1750 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE132M4 5.50 11.90 1725 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160S4 7.50 16.20 1740 x o o – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.20 20.00 1755 o x o – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 23.00 1770 – x o – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 31.00 2325 – o x o o – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 37.50 2323 – – o x o o – – – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 45.50 2365 – – o x o o o – – – –EDRE225S4 30.00 61.00 1770 – – – o x o o o – – –EDRE225M4 37.00 76.00 1770 – – – – o x o o o – –


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDR.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 HzMotors2G-b, 2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5EDRS71S4 0.25 1.58 2515 – x o o o – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.91 2475 – o x o o – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 2.42 2550 – – o x o o – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 2.48 2530 – – o x o o – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 3.20 2540 – – – o o x o – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 4.68 2535 – – – – – o x o – –EDRE90L4 1.50 6.32 2540 – – – – – – o x o oEDRE100L4 2.20 9.35 2933 – – – – – – – o x oEDRE100LC4 3.00 11.78 2555 – – – – – – – – o xEDRE112M4 3.00 11.60 1725 – – – – – – – – o xEDRE132S4 4.00 15.24 1750 – – – – – – – – – oEDRE132M4 5.50 20.61 1725 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160S4 7.50 28.06 1740 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.20 34.64 1755 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 39.84 1770 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 53.69 2330 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 64.95 2340 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 78.81 2375 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225S4 30.00 105.66 1770 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225M4 37.00 131.64 1770 – – – – – – – – – –

Motors2G-b, 2GD-b


7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110EDRS71S4 0.25 1.58 2515 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.91 2475 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 2.42 2550 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 2.48 2530 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 3.20 2540 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 4.68 2535 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.50 6.32 2540 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100L4 2.20 9.35 2933 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100LC4 3.00 11.78 2555 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE112M4 3.00 11.60 1725 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE132S4 4.00 15.24 1750 x o – – – – – – – – –EDRE132M4 5.50 20.61 1725 o x o – – – – – – – –EDRE160S4 7.50 28.06 1740 – o x o – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.20 34.64 1755 – – o x o – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 39.84 1770 – – o x o o – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 53.69 2330 – – – o x o o o – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 64.95 2340 – – – o o x o o – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 78.81 2375 – – – – o o x o o – –EDRE225S4 30.00 105.66 1770 – – – – – – o o x o –EDRE225M4 37.00 131.64 1770 – – – – – – –. o o x o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 HzMotors2G-b, 2D-b, 2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRN80M4 0.75 1.85 2498 – o o x o – – – – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 2.75 2326 – – o o x o – – – – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 3.8 2331 – – – – o x o o – – – –EDRN100LM4 2.2 4.95 2525 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRN100L4 3 7 2523 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRN112M4 4 8.9 1802 – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRN132S4 5.5 11.5 1802 – – – – – – – – o x o –EDRN132M4 7.5 15.7 1817 – – – – – – – – – o x oEDRN132L4 9.2 19.4 1820 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN160M41) 10 20.5 2363 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN160M42) 11 22 2351 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN160L41) 13.5 28 2355 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN160L42) 15 29.5 2352 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN180M41) 15 29 2214 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN180M42) 18.5 35 2213 – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L41) 17.5 32 2220 – – – – – – – – – – – o1) only design 2G-b2) only design 2D-b

Motors2G-b, 2D-b, 2GD-b


15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN132L4 9.2 19.4 1820 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M41) 10 20.5 2363 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M42) 11 22 2351 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L41) 13.5 28 2355 x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L42) 15 29.5 2352 x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180M41) 15 29 2214 x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180M42) 18.5 35 2213 o x o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L41) 17.5 32 2220 x o o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L42) 22 41 2211 o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN200L41) 24 46 2373 – x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN200L42) 30 58 2364 – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRN225S42) 37 68 1781 – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN225M42) 45 83 1782 – – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRN250ME41) 30 61 1787 – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRN250ME42) 55 105 1784 – – – – o x o o o – – – –EDRN280S41) 36 71 1782 – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN280S42) 75 147 1782 – – – – – o x o o o – – –1) only design 2G-b2) only design 2D-b


For power ratings > 75 kW, please contact SEW-EURODRIVE.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 HzMotors2G-b, 2D-b,2GD-b


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRN80M4 0.75 3.2 2537 – – – o o x o – – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 4.8 2346 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 6.6 2351 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRN100LM4 2.2 8.6 2545 – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRN100L4 3 12.1 2543 – – – – – – – – o x o oEDRN112M4 4 15.4 1822 – – – – – – – – – o x oEDRN132S4 5.5 19.9 1802 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN132M4 7.5 27.2 1837 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN132L4 9.2 33.6 1840 – – – – – – – – – – – o



15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN132S4 5.5 19.9 1802 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132M4 7.5 27.2 1837 x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132L4 9.2 33.6 1840 o x o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M41) 10 35.5 2371 o x o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M42) 11 38.1 2371 o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L41) 13.5 48.5 2372 – o x o o – – – – – – – –EDRN160L42) 15 51.1 2372 – o x o o – – – – – – – –EDRN180M41) 15 50.2 2235 – o x o o – – – – – – – –EDRN180M42) 18.5 60.6 2235 – o o x o o – – – – – – –EDRN180L41) 17.5 55.4 2230 – o o x o o – – – – – – –EDRN180L42) 22 71 2230 – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN200L41) 24 79.7 2382 – – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRN200L42) 30 100.5 2382 – – – o o x o o o – – – –EDRN225S42) 37 117.8 1781 – – – – o o x o o – – – –EDRN225M42) 45 143.8 1782 – – – – – o o x o o – – –EDRN250ME41) 30 105.7 1787 – – – – o x o o o – – – –EDRN250ME42) 55 181.9 1784 – – – – – – o o x o o – –EDRN280S41) 36 123 1782 – – – – o o x o o – – – –EDRN280S42) 75 254.6 1782 – – – – – – – – o x o o o1) only design 2G-b2) only design 2D-b



2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



6.4.5 Notes for safe operation

GeneralInstall the frequency inverter outside the potentially explosive atmosphere.

Thermal motor protectionThermal motor protection is ensured by the following measures:• Winding temperature monitoring through PTC thermistors (/TF) built into the wind-

ing. The /TF is monitored via an evaluation unit that complies with Directive2014/34/EU and is labeled with the explosion protection identification II(2)GD/II(2)G.

• Monitoring of the motor current must comply with the IECEx Certificate of Con-formity (IECEx CoC).

• Limitation of the motor torque must comply with the IECEx Certificate of Conform-ity (IECEx CoC).

Overvoltage at the motor terminalsFor FI-operated motors, observe the "Permitted voltage requirement in FI operation"chapter.

EMC measuresThe following components are permitted for the MOVIDRIVE® and MOVITRAC® fre-quency inverters:• Line filters of the NF...-... series• Output chokes of the HD... series• Output filter (sine filter) HF..

If an output filter is used, the voltage drop at the filter must be taken into account.Observe chapter Special application.

Gear unit to Directive 2014/34/EUWhen parameterizing FI-controlled gearmotors, you have to observe the nemax andMamax values of the gear unit.In the following illustration, the values are inserted in the nameplate as an example:

Me max

r/min

Made in Germany

IP

i

Ma

na01.7420653302.0001.17K37/II2GD EDRE90L4/3GD-c/KCC/TF/AL

168 max r/min

Nm Nm 10.0

II 2GD c,k T4/120°C

CLP HC 220 Synth.Oil/0.5 l

Ta -20 ...+40°C

ne 8.91

kg

Greve/Denmark

1500

89

65

641 590 3DE

Fb 1.55

IM M1A

33.000

20303627147

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesSafe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"


6.5 Safe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"Project planning is the basic requirement for safe operation of explosion-proof motors.The following points have to be considered:• Checking the conditions of the typical application• With deviations from the typical application: Calculating the motor terminal voltage• Adhere to the thermal torque limit characteristic curve• Observe the dynamic limit torque• Observe motor limit frequency• Select the suitable frequency inverter• Using a braking resistance if regenerative operation cannot be ruled out com-

pletely• Adhere to the maximum permitted braking work per emergency off case, see

chapter Permitted work done by the BE brake in case of emergency off• Check the overhung and axial loads on the motor shaft of stand-alone motors• Observe the maximum gear unit input speed, see nemax on the nameplate• Observe the maximum gear unit output torque, see Mamax on the nameplate

6.5.1 Motor terminal voltageThe calculation of the motor terminal voltage is an important component of projectplanning.If the conditions differ from the typical application, you have to calculate the start of thefield weakening fD* and the torque ME*, see also chapter Special application.

6.5.2 Maximum permitted torquesThe thermal torque limit characteristic curve shows the permitted maximum torque forcontinuous operation.The values may be exceeded for brief periods if the effective operating point lies be-low the thermal limit characteristic curve, see chapter Typical application.The maximum dynamic limit torque of motors of equipment protection level c must notexceed 150% of MN.

6.5.3 Maximum and minimum permitted frequenciesThe maximum and minimum frequencies are indicated on the nameplate. The actualvalues may not exceed or fall below these specifications.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesSafe frequency inverter operation of motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"


6.5.4 Motor/inverter assignment for motors of design 3G-c, 3D-c and 3GD-cFrequency inverters that have similar values with respect to output current and outputvoltage can also be used. For more information, refer to the standard IEC 60079-15for EDR.. and IEC 60079-7 for EDRN.. motors.Combinations for motor voltages other than 230/400 V can be requested fromSEW‑EURODRIVE.

INFORMATIONThe maximum speed values may be lower due to options and connection of a gearunit. Refer to the nameplate for the permitted values.

EDR.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRS71S4 0.12 0.38 2470 o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71S4 0.18 0.57 2445 o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71S4 0.25 0.86 2415 x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1 2185 o x o o – – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 1.38 2750 o o x o o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 1.33 2870 o o x o o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 1.73 2820 – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.1 2.55 2790 – – o o x o o – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.5 3.5 2780 – – – – o x o o – – – –EDRE100M4 2.2 4.9 2805 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRE100L4 2.2 4.75 2825 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRE100LC4 3 6.4 2850 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE112M4 3 6.4 2460 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE132S4 4 8.4 2510 – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRE132M4 5.5 11.3 2445 – – – – – – – - o x o o

Motors3D-c, 3GD-c


5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRE160S4 7.5 15.4 2500 o x o o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.2 19.1 2540 – o x o o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11 22 2545 – o x o o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15 29.5 2530 – – o x o o o – – – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.5 36 2535 – – – o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22 43 2560 – – – o x o o o o – – – – – – –EDRE225S4 30 59 2565 – – – – o x o o o o – – – – – –EDRE225M4 37 71 2560 – – – – – o x o o o o – – – – –EDRE250M4 45 88 2450 – – – – – – o x o o o o – – – –EDRE280S4 55 106 2450 – – – – – – – o x o o o o – – –EDRE280M4 75 144 2465 – – – – – – – – o x o o o o – –EDRE315K4 90 159 2470 – – – – – – – – – o x o o o o –EDRE315S4 110 198 2110 – – – – – – – – – – o x o o o oEDRE315M4 132 240 1780 – – – – – – – – – – o o x o o oEDRE315L4 160 280 1780 – – – – – – – – – – – o o x o o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDR.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22EDRS71S4 0.12 0.7 2910 o o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71S4 0.18 1.0 2445 x o o o – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71S4 0.25 1.5 2900 – x o o o – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.7 2850 – o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 2.4 2900 – – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 2.4 2930 – – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 3.0 2910 – – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.1 4.4 2860 – – – – o o x o o – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.5 6.1 2920 – – – – – – o x o o – – – –EDRE100M4 2.2 8.5 2905 – – – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRE100L4 2.2 8.2 2930 – – – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRE100LC4 3 11.1 2935 – – – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE112M4 3 11.1 2545 – – – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRE132S4 4 14.5 2565 – – – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRE132M4 5.5 19.6 2535 – – – – – – – – – – o x o o

Motors3D-c, 3GD-c


11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRE160S4 7.5 26.6 2560 o x o o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.2 33.0 2570 o o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11 38.1 2580 – o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15 51.0 2565 – – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.5 62.3 2575 – – o o x o o o – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22 74.4 2585 – – – o o x o o o – – – – –EDRE225S4 30 102 2580 – – – – o o x o o o o – – –EDRE225M4 37 123 2585 – – – – – o o x o o o o – –EDRE250M4 45 152 2465 – – – – – – – o x o o o o –EDRE280S4 55 183 2465 – – – – – – – o o x o o o –EDRE280M4 75 249 2470 – – – – – – – – – o x o o oEDRE315K4 90 275 2475 – – – – – – – – – o o x o oEDRE315S4 110 343 2110 – – – – – – – – – – o o x oEDRE315M4 132 415 1785 – – – – – – – – – – – o o xEDRE315L4 160 484 1785 – – – – – – – – – – – – o o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors3G-c, 3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRN80M4 0.75 1.8 2856 – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 2.6 2881 – – o o x o o – – – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 3.5 2897 – – – o o x o o – – – –EDRN100LS4 2.2 4.9 2878 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRN100L4 3 6.6 2890 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRN112M4 4 8.4 2884 – – – – – – – o x o – –EDRN132S4 5.5 10.7 2879 – – – – – – – – o x o –EDRN132M4 7.5 17 2560 – – – – – – – – o o x –EDRN132L4 9.2 20.5 2560 – – – – – – – – – o o xEDRN160M4 11 23 2560 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN160L4 15 30 2560 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN180M4 18.5 34 2560 – – – – – – – – – – – o

Motors3G-c, 3D-c, 3GD-c


15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN160M4 11 23 2560 o o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L4 15 30 2560 x o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180M4 18.5 34 2560 o x – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L4 22 39 2560 o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN200L4 30 57 2560 – o x o o o o – – – – – –EDRN225S4 37 65 2450 – – o x o o – – – – – – –EDRN225M4 45 82 2450 – – o o x o o o o – – – –EDRN250M4 55 108 2450 – – – o o x o o o o – – –EDRN280S4 75 144 2450 – – – – – o x o o o o – –EDRN280M4 90 164 2450 – – – – – – o x o o o o –EDRN315S4 110 190 1780 – – – – – – – o x o o o oEDRN315M4 132 233 1780 – – – – – – – o o x o o oEDRN315L4 160 277 1780 – – – – – – – – o o x o oEDRN315H4 200 358 1780 – – – – – – – – – o o x o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 230/400 V, 50 HzMotors3G-c, 3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRN80M4 0.75 3.1 2923 – – – o x o o o – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 4.5 2945 – – – – o o x o o – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 6.1 2948 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRN100LS4 2.2 8.5 2933 – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRN100L4 3 11.4 2939 – – – – – – – – o x o oEDRN112M4 4 14.5 2935 – – – – – – – – – o x oEDRN132S4 5.5 18.5 2939 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN132M4 7.5 29.4 2953 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN132L4 9.2 35.5 2565 – – – – – – – – – – – o



15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN112M4 4 14.5 2935 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132S4 5.5 18.5 2939 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132M4 7.5 29.4 2953 x o o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132L4 9.2 35.5 2565 o o o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M4 11 39.8 2565 o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN160L4 15 51.9 2565 – x o o o o – – – – – – –EDRN180M4 18.5 58.8 2565 – o x o o o o – – – – – –EDRN180L4 22 67.5 2565 – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN200L4 30 98.6 2565 – – – o o x o o o – – – –EDRN225S4 37 112 2455 – – – – o o x o o o – – –EDRN225M4 45 142 2455 – – – – – o o x o o o – –EDRN250M4 55 187 2455 – – – – – – o o x o o o –EDRN280S4 75 249 2455 – – – – – – – – o x o o oEDRN280M4 90 284 2455 – – – – – – – – o o x o oEDRN315S4 110 329 1785 – – – – – – – – – o o x oEDRN315M4 132 403 1785 – – – – – – – – – – o o xEDRN315L4 160 479 1785 – – – – – – – – – – – o oEDRN315H4 200 619 1785 – – – – – – – – – – – – o

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDR.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 Hz.Motors3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5EDRS71S4 0.25 0.91 2405 x o o – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.10 2160 o x o o – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 1.40 3020 o o x o o – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 1.43 2935 – o x o o – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 1.77 2980 – o o x o o – – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 2.70 2975 – – o o x o o – – –EDRE90L4 1.50 3.65 2920 – – – – o x o o – –EDRE100L4 2.20 5.40 2985 – – – – – o x o o oEDRE100LC4 3.00 6.80 2995 – – – – – – o x o oEDRE112M4 3.00 6.70 2475 – – – – – – o x o oEDRE132S4 4.00 8.80 2520 – – – – – – – o x oEDRE132M4 5.50 11.90 2460 – – – – – – – – o xEDRE160S4 7.50 16.20 2510 – – – – – – – – – oEDRE160M4 9.20 20.00 2545 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 23.00 2550 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 31.00 2535 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 36.00 2540 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 45.50 2565 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225S4 30.00 57.00 2565 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225M4 37.00 71.00 2565 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225M4 45.00 86.00 2450 – – – – – – – – – –

Motors3D-c, 3GD-c


7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110EDRS71S4 0.25 0.91 2405 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.10 2160 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 1.40 3020 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 1.43 2935 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 1.77 2980 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 2.70 2975 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.50 3.65 2920 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100L4 2.20 5.40 2985 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100LC4 3.00 6.80 2995 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE112M4 3.00 6.70 2475 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE132S4 4.00 8.80 2520 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE132M4 5.50 11.90 2460 o o – – – – – – – – –EDRE160S4 7.50 16.20 2510 x o o – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.20 20.00 2545 o x o o – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 23.00 2550 – x o o – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 31.00 2535 – o x o o o – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 36.00 2540 – – o x o o o – – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 45.50 2565 – – o x o o o o – – –EDRE225S4 30.00 57.00 2565 – – – o x o o o o – –EDRE225M4 37.00 71.00 2565 – – – – o x o o o o –EDRE225M4 45.00 86.00 2450 – – – – – o x o o o o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDR.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 Hz.Motors3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5EDRS71S4 0.25 1.58 3015 – x o o o – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.91 2965 – o x o o o – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 2.42 3055 – – o o x o o – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 2.48 3035 – – o o x o o – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 3.07 3045 – – – o x o o o – –EDRE90M4 1.10 4.68 3040 – – – – – o x o o –EDRE90L4 1.50 6.32 3045 – – – – – – o x o oEDRE100L4 2.20 9.35 3050 – – – – – – – o x oEDRE100LC4 3.00 11.78 3060 – – – – – – – – o xEDRE112M4 3.00 11.60 2550 – – – – – – – – o xEDRE132S4 4.00 15.24 2565 – – – – – – – – – oEDRE132M4 5.50 20.61 2540 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160S4 7.50 28.06 2565 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.20 34.64 2570 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 39.84 2580 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 53.69 2565 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE180L4 18.50 62.35 2575 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE200L4 22.00 78.81 2585 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225S4 30.00 98.73 2580 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225M4 37.00 122.98 2585 – – – – – – – – – –EDRE225M4 45.00 148.96 2465 – – – – – – – – – –

Motors3D-c, 3GD-c


7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110EDRS71S4 0.25 1.58 3015 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS71M4 0.37 1.91 2965 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.55 2.42 3055 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRS80S4 0.55 2.48 3035 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE80M4 0.75 3.07 3045 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90M4 1.10 4.68 3040 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE90L4 1.50 6.32 3045 – – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100L4 2.20 9.35 3050 o – – – – – – – – – –EDRE100LC4 3.00 11.78 3060 o o – – – – – – – – –EDRE112M4 3.00 11.60 2550 o o – – – – – – – – –EDRE132S4 4.00 15.24 2565 x o o – – – – – – – –EDRE132M4 5.50 20.61 2540 o x o o – – – – – – –EDRE160S4 7.50 28.06 2565 – o x o o – – – – – –EDRE160M4 9.20 34.64 2570 – – o x o o – – – – –EDRE180S4 11.00 39.84 2580 – – o x o o o – – – –EDRE180M4 15.00 53.69 2565 – – – o x o o o o – –EDRE180L4 18.50 62.35 2575 – – – o o x o o o – –EDRE200L4 22.00 78.81 2585 – – – – o o x o o o –EDRE225S4 30.00 98.73 2580 – – – – – o o x o o –EDRE225M4 37.00 122.98 2585 – – – – – – o o x o oEDRE225M4 45.00 148.96 2465 – – – – – – – o o x o


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in W connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 HzMotors3G-c, 3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRN80M4 0.75 1.8 3014 – o o x o o – – – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 2.65 3037 – – o o x o o – – – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 3.5 3048 – – – – o x o o – – – –EDRN100LM4 2.2 4.95 3037 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRN100L4 3 6.8 3040 – – – – – – o x o o o –EDRN112M4 4 8.3 2992 – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRN132S4 5.5 11 3039 – – – – – – – – o x o oEDRN132M4 7.5 15.7 3051 – – – – – – – – – o x oEDRN132L4 9.2 19.4 3059 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN160M4 11 22 3062 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN160L4 15 29.5 3064 – – – – – – – – – – – o



15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN132M4 7.5 15.7 3051 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132L4 9.2 19.4 3059 o o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M4 11 22 3062 o o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN160L4 15 29.5 3064 x o o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN180M4 18.5 35 2574 o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN180L4 22 41 2577 o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN200L4 30 58 2578 – o x o o o o – – – – – –EDRN225S4 37 68 1781 – – o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN225M4 45 83 1782 – – o o x o o o o – – – –EDRN250ME4 55 105 1784 – – – – o x o o o o – – –EDRN280S4 75 147 1782 – – – – – o x o o o o – –



2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



EDRN.. motors in m connection at a motor voltage of 220/380 V, 60 HzMotors3G-c, 3D-c, 3GD-c


0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11EDRN80M4 0.75 3.1 3060 – – – o o x o o – – – –EDRN90S4 1.1 4.6 3077 – – – – – o x o o – – –EDRN90L4 1.5 6 3080 – – – – – – o x o o – –EDRN100LM4 2.2 8.5 3075 – – – – – – – o x o o –EDRN100L4 3 11.7 3073 – – – – – – – – o x o oEDRN112M4 4 14.3 3074 – – – – – – – – – o x oEDRN132S4 5.5 18.9 3075 – – – – – – – – – – o xEDRN132M4 7.5 27 3085 – – – – – – – – – – – oEDRN132L4 9.2 33.5 3089 – – – – – – – – – – – o



15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250EDRN112M4 4 14.3 3074 o – – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132S4 5.5 18.9 3075 o o – – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132M4 7.5 27 3085 x o o – – – – – – – – – –EDRN132L4 9.2 33.5 3089 o x o o – – – – – – – – –EDRN160M4 11 38 3090 o x o o o – – – – – – – –EDRN160L4 15 51 3090 – o x o o o – – – – – – –EDRN180M4 18.5 60 2577 – o o x o o o – – – – – –EDRN180L4 22 70 2580 – – o o x o o o – – – – –EDRN200L4 30 100 2597 – – – o o x o o o – – – –EDRN225S4 37 117 1781 – – – – o o x o o o – – –EDRN225M4 45 143 1782 – – – – – o o x o o o – –EDRN250ME4 55 181 1784 – – – – – – o o x o o o –EDRN280S4 75 255 1782 – – – – – – – – o x o o o



2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



6.5.5 Notes for safe operation

General informationInstall the frequency inverter outside the potentially explosive atmosphere.

Thermal motor protectionOnly motors that are equipped with a PTC thermistor (option /TF) are permitted for op-eration on an inverter to ensure that the permitted limit temperature is not exceeded.This must be evaluated using an appropriate device.

Overvoltage at the motor terminalsWhen operating motors on the frequency inverter, refer to the "Permitted voltage re-quirement in FI operation" chapter.

EMC measuresThe following components are permitted for the MOVIDRIVE® and MOVITRAC® fre-quency inverters:• Line filters of the NF...-... series• Output chokes of the HD... series• Output filter (sine filter) HF..

If an output filter is used, the voltage drop at the filter must be taken into account.Observe chapter Special application.

Gear unit to Directive 2014/34/EUWhen parameterizing FI-controlled gearmotors, you have to observe the nemax andMamax values of the gear unit.In the following illustration, the values are inserted in the nameplate as an example:

Me max

r/min

Made in Germany

IP

i

Ma

na01.7420653302.0001.17K37/II2GD EDRE90L4/3GD-c/KCC/TF/AL

168 max r/min

Nm Nm 10.0

II 2GD c,k T4/120°C

CLP HC 220 Synth.Oil/0.5 l

Ta -20 ...+40°C

ne 8.91

kg

Greve/Denmark

1500

89

65

641 590 3DE

Fb 1.55

IM M1A

33.000

20303627147

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesTypical application


6.6 Typical applicationThe following conditions must be met:

U [V]

9007204712625163

• Supply system tolerance: ±5%• Installation with and without external NF line filter• Frequency inverter:

– MOVITRAC® B– MOVIDRIVE® B

• Installation without line choke and without sine filter• Installation of HD output choke• Max. motor cable length 100 m

Maximum permitted voltage drop: 10 V• Rated motor voltage1) : 219 – 241 V /

380 – 420 V or 230 / 400 V (here for Vline = 400 V)

1) The rated motor voltage must be selected depending on the line voltage.

6.6.1 Motor terminal voltageThe thermal torque limit curves are based on the assumption that all conditions of atypical application are fulfilled.The motor terminal voltage must only be dimensioned if the conditions of a typical ap-plication are not met. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE in this case.23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

6 Operating modes and limit valuesTypical application


6.6.2 Limit characteristic curves of EDR.., EDRN.. motors in inverter operationThe thermal torque characteristic curves show the permitted maximum torque ratingsfor continuous operation.The values may be exceeded for brief periods if the effective operating point lies be-low the thermal limit characteristic curve.

EPL "Gc" and "Dc"The following diagram shows the typical limit characteristic curve for EDR..71 – 225motors, EDRN80 – 225 motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc". Refer to the nameplate for theexact values.

0.00

0.20

0.40

0.60

0.80

1.00

1.20

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

M/Mn

f [Hz]

[7]

[6]

D Y D∆D*∆

A

B

C

EY

E*Y

E ∆

E*∆

D*Y

[1][1]

[2]

[3]

[4][5]

18014402161433995

[1] Star connection [6] Supply frequency of the motor[2] Forced cooling fan /VE [7] Torque ratio M/MN

[3] Delta connection[4] Typical application – star connection[5] Typical application – delta connection

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesTypical application


The following diagram shows the typical limit characteristic curve for EDR..250 – 315motors, EDRN250 – 315 motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc". Refer to the nameplate forthe exact values.

0,00

0,20

0,40

0,60

0,80

1,00

1,20

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

M/Mn

f [Hz]

[8]

[7]

[2][1]

[3] [4]

[1]

[5]

[6]

D Y D∆=E

∆D*∆=E*

∆

A

B

C

E Y

D*Y

E*Y

14375221771

[1] Star connection forEDR..250/280

[5] Typical application – star connection

[2] Star connection for EDR..315 [6] Typical application – delta connection[3] Forced cooling fan /VE [7] Supply frequency of the motor[4] Delta connection [8] Torque ratio M/MN

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesTypical application


EPL "Gb" and "Db"The following diagram shows the typical limit characteristic curve for EDR..71 – 225motors, EDRN80 – 315 motors with EPL "Gb" und "Db". Refer to the nameplate forthe exact values.

0,00

0,20

0,40

0,60

0,80

1,00

1,20

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

M/Mn

f [Hz]

[6]

[5]

[1][1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

D Y D∆=E∆D*∆

E*∆

A

B

C

EY

D*Y

E*Y

[2]

27021601416179083

[1] Star connection [5] Supply frequency of the motor[2] Delta connection [6] Torque ratio M/MN

[3] Typical application – star connection[4] Typical application – delta connection

Points A, B and C These 3 points limit the torque in the lower speed range in order to protect the motorfrom overheating due to the reduced cooling. They do not have to be projected. Thevariables are included in the startup software and are automatically assigned the per-mitted values during startup.

Points D, E The two points illustrate the progress of the torque characteristic in the field weaken-ing if the motor terminal voltage corresponds to the rated motor voltage (ideal case).Field weakening begins at point D. Point E is the permitted torque at limit speed.

Points D*, E* (typical applica-tion)

The typical application is characterized by the fact that due to the voltage drop the mo-tor terminal board is not provided with the entire supply voltage. This causes a shift ofthe field weakening progress. The field weakening starts in point D*.For the limit speed, the shift of the characteristic results in a reduced torque E*.The startup software calculates both points D* and E* for the typical application andsets the respective parameters.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6Operating modes and limit valuesSpecial application


6.7 Special applicationIf the conditions of the typical application are not met, the motor terminal voltage candeviate and, as a result, the motor can heat up excessively.The deviating motor terminal voltage changes the shape of the thermal characteristiccurve. The calculation and observation of points D (field weakening fD*) and E (currentlimit IE* and torque ME*) during startup prevents the motor from overheating. The cur-rent limit IE* must only be calculated for drives of EPL "Gb" and "Db".The project planning procedure is as follows:• Determining the maximum terminal voltage:• Calculating the field weakening fD*

• Calculating the torque characteristics ME*

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesSpecial application


6.7.1 Calculating the motor terminal voltageThe calculation of the motor terminal voltage is an important component of projectplanning. The results must be considered during startup and corrected, if necessary,to prevent excessive heating of the motor.

V [V]

Line choke

Line filter

Inverter

Output filter

Motor

Vline, observe tolerances

Δ V

Δ VLF

VI_FI = Vline – Δ VLC – Δ VLF

VO_FI = 0.925 x VI_FI

Δ VHF

Δ VCable

Vmotor terminal voltage = VO_FI – Δ VLF – Δ VCable

LC

27021599222292107

VI_FI = Inverter input voltage in VΔ VCable = Voltage drop across incoming motor cable in VVO_FI = Inverter output voltage in VΔ VLC = Voltage drop across line choke in VΔ VHF = Voltage drop across sine filter in VΔ VLF = Voltage drop across line filter, in V

For inverter operation, the motor voltage is calculated as follows:

V V V V V VMotor Line LineFilter Choke FI Outp Filter Cabl= − + + +( / .∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ee )

1495196939

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Line voltage Vline

The line voltage is determined via direct measurement with multimeter or, alternat-

ively, by reading off the DC link voltage (VDC link) in the inverter ( V Vline DC link= / 2

).

Voltage drop at the line choke Δ Vline choke

The calculation of the voltage drop can be carried out in two ways:1. Calculation based on an equation2. based on tabular valuesBoth options are illustrated below.

1. Voltage drop at the line choke

The extent of the voltage drop is determined by the magnetizing inductance and theohmic share of the induction.Typical connection pattern:U1

V1

W1

PE

U2

V2

W2

Equation for calculating the voltage drop:

∆V I f L RLC FI LC LC= × × × × × +I_ ( )3 2 2 2π

LLC Inductance of line choke in HRLC Ohmic resistance of line choke in ΩΔVLC Voltage drop across line choke in VII_FI Nominal input current of the inverterFor the inductance L and the ohmic resistance R of the inductance, please refer to thedocuments for the line choke.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



2. Table "percentage voltage drop when using a line choke"

The following table show the extent of the voltage drop of the line voltage for the useof a line choke.

Frequency inverter power rating

Nominal current of thesupply system

frequency inverter

Line choke Voltage drop

kW A % VN

0.25 0.9 ND020-013

0

0.37 1.4

0.55 1.8

0.75 2.2

1.1 2.8

1.5 3.6

2.2 5

3 6.3

4 8.6

5.5 11.3

7.5 14.4

11 21.6 ND030-0231

15 28.8

22 41.4 ND045-013 1

30 54 ND085-013

1.537 65.7

45 80.1

55 94.5 ND150-0132

75 117

90 153 ND200-00331

110 180

132 225 ND300-0053 1.5

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Voltage drop at the line filterThe line filter consists of current compensated radio interference suppression chokes.The current flows through the winding of the chokes and the resulting magnetic fieldscompensate each other.This is why the inverter current that flows through the line filter is only dampened bythe ohmic share of the inductance and the leakage inductance. The leakage induct-ance is very low compared to the magnetizing inductance. Hence the voltage drop viathe line filter can be neglected.Typical connection pattern:L1

L2

L3

L1´

L2´

L3´

PE PE

Equation for calculating the voltage drop:

∆V I f L RLF I FI Leak LF= × × × × × +_ ( )3 2 2 2π

ΔVLF Voltage drop across line filter, in VII_FI Nominal input current of the inverter in ALLeak Leakage inductance in HRLF Ohmic resistance in Ω

Determining the inverter voltageThe inverter input voltage is determined by:• Measuring the mains voltage, or• Calculating the voltage according to the formula

V V V VFI Line LC LFI_ = − ∆ − ∆

or• Reading-off the DC link voltage in the frequency inverter

Voltage drop at the inverter VFI

The voltage drop at the inverter is determined by:• the voltages across the rectifier path• the voltages at the output stage transistors• the principle of converting supply voltage into DC link voltage and into the rotating

field voltage• the anti-overlap times resulting from the clocking of the output stage and the miss-

ing voltage-time areas

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



• the modulation process• the load state and the energy dissipation of the DC link capacitors

INFORMATIONTo simplify the calculation, use the value of 7.5% of the line input voltage. Thisvalue is to be taken as the maximum possible voltage drop at the inverter. This al-lows for a reliable project planning.

Voltage drop at the output filter Δ VOutp.filter

The voltage drop at the output filter is proportional to the modulated fundamental out-put frequency and the motor current. It must be requested from the manufacturer ofthe output filter in individual cases. The voltage drop of SEW output filters can be readfrom the table.

∆V I f L ROutp Filter. ( )= × × × × × +3 2 2 2π

9007199524175499

Since the resistance R is small enough to be neglected compared to the inductance L,the equation can be simplified to:

∆V I f LOutp Filter. = × × × × ×3 2 π

9007199615800459

Filters Choke Voltage dropType BG IN400 IN500 L V = 400 V V = 500 V

50 Hz 60 Hz 87 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 87 HzA A mH V V V V V V

HF 008-503 1 2.5 2 11 15 18 26 12 14 21

HF 015-503 1 4 3 9 20 24 34 15 18 26

HF 022-503 1 6 5 7 23 27 40 19 23 33

HF 030-503 1 8 6 5.5 24 29 42 18 22 31

HF 040-503 2 10 8 4.5 24 29 43 20 24 34

HF 055-503 2 12 10 3.2 21 25 36 17 21 30

HF 075-503 2 16 13 2.4 21 25 36 17 20 30

HF 023-403 3 23 19 1.6 20 24 35 17 20 29

HF 033-403 3 33 26 1.2 22 26 37 17 20 30

HF 047-403 4 47 38 0.8 20 25 36 17 20 29

HD.. output chokesThe voltage drop is negligible (current-compensated) for SEW-EURODRIVE outputchokes (HD..).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Voltage drop at the motor cable Δ VMot.cable

The voltage drop of the motor cable depends on the motor current and the cross sec-tion, length and material of the cable. The voltage drop can be read from the followingtable.

Cablecross sec-tionmm2

Load with IA

4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40

Copper Voltage drop ΔV in V with length = 100 m and ϑ = 70 °C

1.5 5.3 8 10.61) 13.31) 17.31) 21.31) 2) 2) 2) 2)

2.5 3.2 4.8 6.4 8.1 10.4 12.81) 161) 2) 2) 2)

4 1.9 2.8 3.8 4.7 6.5 8.0 10 12.51) 2) 2)

6 4.4 5.3 6.4 8.3 9.9 2)

10 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.2

16 3.3 3.9 5.2

25 2.5 3.31) This value is not recommended by SEW‑EURODRIVE.2) Load not permitted according to IEC 60364-5-52.

Cablecross sec-tionmm2

Load with IA

50 63 80 100 125 150 200 250 300

Copper Voltage drop ΔV in V with length = 100 m and ϑ = 70 °C

10 10.2 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)

16 6.5 7.9 10.0 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)

25 4.1 5.1 6.4 8.0 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)

35 2.9 3.6 4.6 5.7 7.2 8.6 1) 1) 1)

50 4.0 5.0 6.0 1) 1) 1)

70 4.6 1) 1)

95 3.4 4.2 1)

150 2.7 3.3

185 2.71) Load not permitted according to IEC 60364-5-52.

INFORMATIONThe voltage drop at the cable is compensated by the IxR compensation.SEW‑EURODRIVE frequency inverters adjust this value in the "Automatic calibrationON" mode every time the frequency inverter is started. In order to provide for avoltage reserve in the frequency inverter for this compensation, you have to take intoaccount the voltage loss via the motor cable.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



6.7.2 Calculating the field weakening and the torque characteristicThe calculations described below require values from the EU type examination certific-ate.The following diagram illustrates the S1 limit characteristic curve of the EDRE90L4 ofequipment protection level b.

0

5

10

15

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Nm

Hz

A

B

C D* D

E

E*

18014403598380299

Field weakeningThe field weakening is calculated as follows:

fV

VfD

MotorTermVoltage

RatedMotorVoltagebase* = ×

fD Start of field weakening (ideal)fIN Maximum speedfD* Start of field weakening ( depending on the actual motor terminal voltage)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Torque characteristicThe torque characteristic is calculated as follows:

M M

f

f

f

f

E Nom

D

I

D

I

*

* *

= ×

+

2

2

9007204283228683

0

5

10

15

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Nm

Hz

A

B

C D* D

E

E*

9007204343645707

fD Start of field weakening (ideal)fI Maximum speedME* reduced torque at maximum speed (depending on the actual motor terminal

voltage)

INFORMATIONYou have to calculate several auxiliary points to determine an exact curve progres-sion.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

6 Operating modes and limit valuesGroup drive


6.8 Group driveGroup drive means that several motors are simultaneous operated at one frequencyinverter.

INFORMATIONOnly EDR../EDRN.. motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db" may be operated as group drive.

Motors in design 3D-c may be used as group drives in zone 22 if each individual motoro the group is configured, designed, and identified for frequency inverter operation.The following restrictions do apply:• For applications, the individual motors must be connected slip-free, non-positive,

or positive.• Only connect identical motors with the same rated data (power rating, speed.

voltage, and frequency).• The following condition must be met: Inverter nominal output current ≤ 1.5 × sum

of the rated motor currents• Each motor must be designed with a thermal motor protection (PTC thermistor).• Each individual temperature sensor must be externally monitored by a separate

evaluation unit.• If one evaluation unit trips, all motors of the group must be stopped.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7Startup


7 Startup

INFORMATION• It is essential to comply with the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation.• In case of problems, refer to the chapter "Malfunctions" (→ 2 216).

WARNINGElectric shock due to incorrect installation.Severe or fatal injuries.• Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 IEC 60947-4-1 for switching the

motor.• When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instruc-

tions in the frequency inverter operating instructions.

CAUTIONThe surfaces of the drive can be very hot during operation.Risk of burns.• Let the motor cool down sufficiently before you start working on it.

INFORMATIONLimit the maximum speed at the inverter. For information on the procedure, refer tothe documentation of the inverter.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7 StartupBefore startup


7.1 Before startupPrior to startup make sure that:• The drive is undamaged and not blocked.• Any transport locks have been removed.• The measures stipulated in chapter "Extended storage of motors" (→ 2 31) are

performed after extended storage periods.• All connections have been made correctly.• The direction of rotation of the motor/gearmotor is correct.

– Motor rotating clockwise: U, V, W (T1, T2, T3) to L1, L2, L3• All protective covers are installed correctly.• All motor protection equipment is active and set for the rated motor current.• There are no other sources of danger.• Loose elements like keys are appropriately secured.• The brake is not manually released.

– The set screw of /HF option is loosened correctly.– The hand lever of the /HR option has been removed and correctly attached to

the stator using the designated clamps.

7.2 During startupDuring startup, make sure that:• Motor is running correctly. This means for example:

– The motor is not overloaded.– Constant speed.– There are no unusual noises.– There are no unusual vibrations.

• The braking torque corresponds to the respective application. Observe the chapter"Technical data" (→ 2 186) and the nameplate.

INFORMATIONOn brakemotors with manual brake release with automatic re-engaging function, thehand lever must be removed after startup. A bracket is provided for storing the leveron the outside of the motor housing.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7StartupParameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"


7.3 Parameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"

INFORMATIONWhen you start up the frequency inverter, observe the operating instructions of therespective frequency inverter as well as the operating instructions of the gear unit ifyou use a gearmotor.

7.3.1 Before startupPrior to startup, check that all the conditions for the typical application are met, seechapter "Typical application" (→ 2 111). In the event of deviations from these condi-tions, you have to calculate the maximum terminal voltage, the field weakening range,and the torque characteristics prior to startup. The effective operating point must bebelow the new thermal characteristic curve.

7.3.2 Startup procedure for MOVITRAC® 07BObserve the following points during startup:• Use the latest version of MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software for guided startup.• The startup can only be activated in parameter set 1 due to the current limiting

function for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db".• The system configuration only allows for single drives.• You can set either "V/f" or "vector-controlled" for the control mode.• For the application, you can only select speed control. The options "Hoist", "DC

braking" or "Flying start function" must not be used.• The operating mode must always be set to "4-quadrant operation".• Select the proper motor series in the "Motor type" window.• In the "Motor selection" window, you must choose the design, the line voltage, the

motor voltage, the connection type and the type of plant configuration in addition tothe motor.

Current limitIn guided startup, the current limit parameter is set to 150% IN Mot in the application win-dow. This value must be reduced according to the permitted maximum output torqueat the gear unit Mamax.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7 StartupParameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db"


Current monitoringThe parameters that need to be set for monitoring the current depend on the motor.

X

fEf [Hz]

fA fB fC fD

I1

1,5 In (Motor)

Motor type-

In (Motor)

I2

E

C

Io

D

B

A

dependent

9007202345135243

In Nominal current in A X Current limitingI1 Permitted max. current in A f Frequency in HzI2 Permitted continuous current range

in AA, B,C, D, E

Limiting points

IO Overload current in A

After motor startup, current limitation I1 is active. Current limitation I2 determines thecurrent that is permanently permitted. The Ex-e motor current limiting function is activ-ated automatically during startup for SEW‑EURODRIVE motors with EPL "Gb" and"Db".The speed-dependent current limit is activated via the according motor selection andall the parameters of group P560 are set for points A to E, see the following parametertable. Additionally, the values are listed in the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (CoC).

Parameter Point A Point B Point C Point D Point EFrequency in Hz P561 P563 P565 P567 P570

Calculation via startup software

Current limit in% of IN FI

P562 P564 P566 P568 P571

Calculation via startup software

In the event of deviations from the typical application, you have to recalculate andmanually adapt the parameters for points D (field weakening fD) and E (current limit IE),see the following table:

Parameter Point A Point B Point C Point D Point EFrequency in Hz P561 P563 P565 P567 P570

Calculation via startup software Is required +manual input offD*

via startup soft-ware

Current limit in% of IN FI

P562 P564 P566 P568 P571

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Parameter Point A Point B Point C Point D Point ECalculation via startup software Is required +

manual input of fE*

IE* = IE x ME*/ME

Maximum speedThe maximum motor speed must be limited in the "System limits" window. Observethe following when you set the parameter maximum speed:• Maximum speed ≤ start of field weakening• Maximum speed ≤ motor limit speed• Maximum speed ≤ Maximum gear unit input speed nemax (see gear unit nameplate)

if a gear unit according to Directive 2014/34/EU is used.

Automatic adjustmentThe parameter automatic adjustment is activated via guided startup. Thus, the fre-quency inverter sets parameter IxR value with each enable signal. A manual change isnot permitted.

Monitoring func-tion:

A 24 V backup mode prevents that the current-time monitoring is reset in case of adisconnection from the supply system, see chapter Overload protection.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



7.3.3 Startup procedure for MOVIDRIVE® B

INFORMATIONThe MOVIDRIVE® B devices are only suitable for the basic control range, i.e. the con-nected motor of equipment protection level b must not be operated in the field weak-ening range. Otherwise the approval for operation in explosion-proof areas becomesinvalid.

Observe the following points during startup:• Use the latest version of MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software for guided startup.• The startup can only be activated in parameter set 1 due to the current limiting

function for motors with EPL "Gb" and "Db".• The first startup must always be a complete startup.• The motor configuration only allows for individual drives. You can set either "V/f" or

"vector-controlled" (VFC) for the control mode.• Select the proper motor series in the "Motor type" window.• In the "SEW motor type 1" window, you must choose the design, the nominal mo-

tor voltage, the connection type, and the line voltage in addition to the motor.• In the application selection window, you can only select speed control. The options

"Hoist", "DC braking" or "Flying start function" must not be used.• The operating mode must always be set to "4-quadrant operation".

Current limitIn guided startup, the current limit parameter is set to 150% IN Mot in the parameter win-dow 1. This value must be reduced according to the permitted maximum output torqueat the gear unit (Mamax).

Current monitoringThe parameters that need to be set for monitoring the current depend on the motor.

X

fmaxf [Hz]

fA fB fC

1.5 In (Motor)

Motor type

dependent

In (Motor)

IOIü

A

C

B

I2

I1

9007203332583051

In Nominal current in A X Current limitingI1 Permitted max. current in A f Frequency in HzI2 Permitted continuous current

range in AA, B,C

Limiting points

IO Overload current in A

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



After motor startup, current limitation I1 is active. Current limitation I2 determines thecurrent that is permanently permitted. The Ex-e motor current limiting function is activ-ated automatically during startup for SEW‑EURODRIVE motors with EPL "Gb" and"Db".The characteristic curve for MOVIDRIVE® B is defined by operating points A, B and C.The parameters of group P560 are preset during startup, see following table. The val-ues are also specified in the EU type examination certificate.

Parameter Point A Point B Point CFrequency in Hz P561 P563 P565

Current limit in % of IN FI P562 P564 P566



2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Automatic adjustmentThe parameter automatic adjustment is activated via guided startup. Thus, the fre-quency inverter sets parameter IxR value with each enable signal. A manual change isnot permitted.

Monitoring func-tion:

A 24 V backup mode prevents that the current-time monitoring is reset in case of adisconnection from the supply system, see chapter Overload protection.

INFORMATIONIf the mains is switched off without 24 V backup mode, the monitoring function is re-set completely.In this case the approval for operation in explosion-proof areas becomes invalid.

7.3.4 Overload protectionThe requirements for the overload protection of the motor are defined in the IECExCertificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC). The following section describes the overloadprotection included in MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters and MOVIDRIVE® B.Operation above the permitted current range is permitted for 60 seconds. After about50 seconds, the current is reduced to the permitted value along a ramp within10 seconds to prevent a sudden reduction of the current limitation and thus torqueshocks. The current can exceed the permitted range again after a recovery time of 10minutes. Operation below 5 Hz is permitted for 60 seconds. After this time haselapsed, the unit switches off with error F110 "Ex e protection" and performs an emer-gency stop as a fault response.The digital inputs P62_ can be parameterized to "Ex e current limitation active".Preconditions for the output being set ("1" signal):• Current limit 1 exceeded• Recovery time not yet elapsed• Operation < 5 Hz longer than 60 secondsThe current-time monitoring is not reset by an error reset.The current-time monitoring is active for both mains operation and 24 V backup mode.

INFORMATIONThird-party frequency inverters must comply with the overload protection require-ments in the IECEx Certificate of Conformity (IECEx CoC).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7StartupParameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"


7.4 Parameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"

INFORMATIONWhen you start up the frequency inverter, observe the operating instructions of therespective frequency inverter as well as the operating instructions of the gear unit ifyou use a gearmotor.

7.4.1 Before startupPrior to startup, check that all the conditions for the typical application are met, seechapter "Typical application" (→ 2 111). In the event of deviations from these condi-tions, you have to calculate the maximum terminal voltage, the field weakening range,and the torque characteristics prior to startup. The effective operating point must bebelow the new thermal characteristic curve.

7.4.2 Startup procedure for MOVITRAC® 07BObserve the following points during startup:• Use the latest version of MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software for guided startup.• Startup and operation of motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc" is possible in parameter

set 1 and 2.• You can set either "V/f" or "vector-controlled" for the control mode.• For the application, you can only select speed control and hoist application. Do not

use the options "DC braking" or "Flying start function".• The operating mode must always be set to "4-quadrant operation".• Select the proper motor series in the "Motor type" window.• In the "Motor selection" window, you must choose the design, the line voltage, the

motor voltage and the connection type in addition to the motor.

Current limitIn guided startup, the current limit parameter is set to 150% IN Mot. in the applicationwindow. This value must be reduced according to the permitted maximum outputtorque at the gear unit Mamax.



Automatic adjustmentThe automatic adjustment parameter is activated via guided startup. Thus, the fre-quency inverter sets parameter IxR value with each enable signal. A manual change isnot permitted.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7 StartupParameter setting: Frequency inverters for motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc"


7.4.3 Startup procedure for MOVIDRIVE® BObserve the following points during startup:• Use the latest version of MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software for guided startup.• Startup and operation of motors with EPL "Gc" and "Dc" is possible in parameter

set 1 and 2.• The first startup must always be a complete startup.• You can set either "V/f" or "vector-controlled" (VFC) for the control mode.• Select the proper motor series in the "Motor type" window.• In the "SEW motor type 1" window, you must choose the design, the nominal mo-

tor voltage, the connection type, and the line voltage in addition to the motor.• For the application options, you can only select "speed control" and "hoist" func-

tion. Do not use the options "DC braking" or "Flying start function".• The operating mode must always be set to "4-quadrant operation".

Current limitIn guided startup, the Current limit parameter is set to 150% IN Mot. in parameter win-dow 1. This value must be reduced according to the permitted maximum output torqueat the gear unit Mamax.



Automatic adjustmentThe automatic adjustment parameter is activated via guided startup. Thus, the fre-quency inverter sets parameter IxR value with each enable signal. A manual change isnot permitted.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

7StartupMotors with backstop /RS


7.5 Motors with backstop /RSA /RS backstop is used to block/preclude a direction of rotation of the motor. The dir-ection of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan guard of the motor or on the gear-motor housing.Observe the direction of rotation of the end shaft and the number of stages when youmount the motor to the gear unit. Do not startup the motor in the blocking direction(note the correct phase angle when connecting the motor). For inspection purposes,you can operate the backstop once with half the motor voltage in the blocking direc-tion.If a conversion is required to change the blocking direction, follow the instructions inchapter "Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop" (→ 2 183).

7.5.1 Limit speed of the backstopIf a motor is equipped with a backstop, the sprag lift-off speed represents the lowerspeed limit during operation on a frequency inverter.

Motors Locking torque Lift-off speed of thesprags

Maximum speed

Nm min-1 min-1

EDRS71 – 95 890 5000

EDR..80 EDRN80 130 860 5000

EDRE90/100 EDRN90/100 370 750 5000

EDRE112/132 EDRN112/132S 490 730 5000

EDRE160 EDRN132M/L 700 700 4500

EDRE180 EDRN160/180 1400 610 4500

EDRE200/225 EDRN200/225 2500 400 3500

EDRE250/280 EDNR250/280 2600 400 2600

EDRE315 EDRN315 6300 320 2500

WARNINGExcessive heating of the motor current due to additional friction losses.Severe or fatal injuries.• Always adhere to the limit values of the permitted speeds. The values must be

between the lift-off speed and the maximum speed.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenance


8 Inspection and maintenance

WARNINGRisk of crushing if the hoist falls or in the event of uncontrolled unit behavior.Severe or fatal injuries.• Secure or lower the hoist drives.• Secure and/or fence in the driven machine.• Before you start working on the unit, disconnect the motor and all connected op-

tions from the power supply.• Secure the motor against unintended power-up.• Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid spare parts list.• Always replace the brake coil together with the brake control.

CAUTIONThe surfaces of the drive can be very hot during operation.Risk of burns.• Let the motor cool down sufficiently before you start working on it.

CAUTIONFor assembly, the ambient temperature and the oil seals themselves may not becolder than 0 °C, otherwise the oil seals might be damaged.

INFORMATIONApply grease with a grease depot to the lip of the oil seal before assembly. For in-formation on the lubricants, refer to chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-cor-rosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 211).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenance


INFORMATION• Only use genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid spare and wearing

parts list, otherwise the approval for use in explosion-proof areas becomes invalid.• The routine test must be repeated whenever motor parts relating to explosion pro-

tection are replaced.• Ensure that the motor is assembled correctly and all openings have been plugged

after service and maintenance work.• If the motor is opened during inspection/maintenance, it must be cleaned before

closing.• Clean motors in explosion-proof areas regularly. Prevent dust from building up

higher than 5 mm. Do not use processes that cause strong electrical charge forcleaning.

• Explosion protection is largely dependent on the IP degree of protection. There-fore, always check that the seals are fitted correctly and in perfect condition whenperforming any work on the machine.

• Explosion protection can only be ensured if motors are serviced and maintainedcorrectly.

• If you repaint the motors or gearmotors, you have to observe the requirements re-garding the prevention of electrostatic charge according to IEC 60079-0, seechapter Coating.

INFORMATIONSafe operation requires regular maintenance. The user is responsible for mainten-ance of the drive. Adhere to the Industrial Safety Regulation, as well as toIEC 60079-17.

RepairsIf you repair explosion-proof units, strictly observe the country-specific standards. InGermany, the operating safety regulations (BetrSichV) and the Product Safety Act(ProdSG) apply.In case of a repair, observe important information on checks and maintenance of elec-trical systems and repairs and maintenance of electrical devices in the standardsIEC 60079-17 and IEC 60079-19. Only SEW‑EURODRIVE Service, repair workshopsthat have the necessary expertise may repair the motor.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenanceInspection and maintenance intervals


8.1 Inspection and maintenance intervalsThe following table lists the inspection and maintenance intervals:

Unit / part of unit Time interval What to do?BE brake • If used as a working brake:

At least every 3000 operating hours1)

• If used as a holding brake:Every 0.5 to 2 years, depending on op-erating conditions1)

Brake inspection• Measuring the brake disk thickness• Brake disk, lining• Measure and set working air gap• Pressure plate• Driver/gearing• Pressure rings• Sucking off any abrasion• Inspect the switch contacts and re-

place them, if necessary (e.g. in caseof burn-out)

Motor • Every 10000 operating hours2) 3) Motor inspection:• Check rolling bearing and change if

necessary• Replace the oil seal• Clean cooling air ducts

Drive • May vary2) • Touch up or renew the surfaces/anti‑corrosion coating

• if applicable, clean condensation drainhole at the bottom of the fan guard

• Clean clogged bores1) Wear times are subject to many factors and can be quite short. The machine manufacturer must calculate the required inspection/

maintenance intervals individually in accordance with the project planning documents (e.g. "Project Planning for Drives").2) The interval depends on outer influences and can be very short, e.g. in the event of high dust concentration in the environment.3) For EDRE250 – 280, EDRN225 – 315 with relubrication device, note the shortened relubrication periods in chapter "Bearing lubrica-

tion EDRE250 – 280, EDRN225 – 315 with relubrication device /NS".

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenanceInspection and maintenance intervals


8.1.1 Sealing pointsPerform the maintenance of seals according to the following table:

Sealing pointItem no. Position Use Maintenance/inspection[28] Closing plug (for

BE20 – 122, if nomanual brake releaseis installed)

BE20 – 122 • Exchange during each disassembly

[30] Oil seal at non-inputend

BE60 – 122 • Every 10000 operating hours1)

[37] Backstop sealing ring EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S

• Every 10000 operating hours1)

• Check the sealing ring seat for corrosion(rust).

• Replace brake, if necessary.

[47] O-ring of manualbrake release

BE05 – 122 • Every 10000 operating hours at thelatest1)

• Exchange during each disassembly

[61] NutMounting rest for thenuts on the magnetbody

BE05 – 122 • SEW-L-Spezial must be replaced duringeach inspection or maintenance.

• The nuts must be replaced during eachdisassembly.

[66] Sealing strip BE05 – 122 • Check the sealing strip for plastic de-formation during each inspection ormaintenance and replace it if necessary.If the sealing strip seats show signs ofcorrosion, replace the brake.

• Replace the sealing strip at least every10000 operating hours.

[95] Sealing ring (BE05 – 11, incl. manualbrake release seal)

BE05 – 122 • Every 10000 operating hours1)

• Check the sealing ring seat for corrosion(rust). If the seats show signs of corro-sion, replace the brake or the magnetbody.

[106]/[250]

Input end oil seal EDR../EDRN.. • Every 10000 operating hours1)

[390] Cable bushingStator(Brake) Endshield

BE20 – 62 • Exchange during each disassembly

[392] StatorB-side endshield,brake endshield, orbackstop endshield

EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenanceInspection and maintenance intervals


Sealing pointItem no. Position Use Maintenance/inspection[901]/[1607]

Friction disk brakeendshieldBackstop housingbrake endshield

EDR..71 – 132 andEDRN80 – 132S /BE..or /RS (flat gasket)


EDR..160 – 315 and/orEDRN132M – 315with /BE.. or /RS (O-ring)

[703]/[900]

Friction disk screwBackstop housing

EDRN100 /BE.. or /RS • Exchange during each disassembly(pressure-tight thread locker e.g. precote® 85-8)

1) The interval depends on outer influences and can be very short, e.g. in the event of high dust concentration in the environment.

8.1.2 Connection cablesCheck the connection cable for damage at regular intervals and replace if necessary.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenanceBearing lubrication


8.2 Bearing lubrication

8.2.1 Bearing lubrication for EDR..71 – 280, EDRN80 – 280 motorsIn standard design, the bearings are lubricated for life.

8.2.2 Bearing lubrication for EDRE250 – 280, EDRN225 – 315 motors with relubricationdevice /NS

EDRE250 – 280, EDRN225 – 315 motors can be equipped with a relubrication device.The following figure shows the positions of the lubrication devices.

375353099

[1] Relubrication device in type A according to DIN 71412

Under normal operating conditions and at an ambient temperature between -20 °C to+40 °C, SEW‑EURODRIVE uses ESSO Polyrex EM (K2P-20 DIN 51825), a polyurea-based mineral high-performance, high-temperature grease for initial lubrication.For motors in the low temperature range up to -40 °C SEW‑EURODRIVE uses SKFGXN or LGHP2, which are also a polyurea-based mineral grease.

RelubricationThe grease can be purchased from SEW‑EURODRIVE in 400 g cartridges. For therelevant order information, refer to chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-corro-sion agents and sealants" (→ 2 211).

INFORMATIONOnly mix lubricants of the same thickness type, the same base oil and the same con-sistency (NLGI class)!

Grease the motor bearings in accordance with the information on the lubricant plate.The used grease collects inside the motor and should be removed every 6 to 8 re-lubrication cycles during an inspection. Each time you relubricate, ensure that thebearing is two-thirds full.After relubrication of the motors, you should startup slowly, if possible, so that thegrease is distributed evenly.The relubrication channels leading the grease from the grease nipples to the bearingsmust always be filled with grease. This is usually ensured be adhering to the relubrica-tion intervals. During maintenance work, the grease may remain in the channels anddoes not need to be removed.23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

8 Inspection and maintenanceReinforced bearings


Re-lubrication periodFor the relubrication intervals of the bearings, adhere to the requirements stated in thetable:• Ambient temperature: -20 °C to +40 °C• Rated speed that corresponds to that of a 4-pole AC motor• normal loadIn case of higher ambient temperatures, higher speeds, or larger loads, the relubrica-tion intervals are shortened. Use 1.5 times of the stated quantity for the initial filling.The relubrication channels leading the grease from the grease nipples to the bearingsmust always be filled with grease. This is usually ensured be adhering to the relubrica-tion intervals. During maintenance work, the grease may remain in the channels anddoes not need to be removed.

Horizontal mountingposition

Vertical mountingposition

Motors Duration Quantity Duration QuantityEDRN225 /NS 5000 h 40 g 3000 h 60 g

EDRE250 – 315 /NSEDRN250 – 315 /NS

5000 h 50 g 3000 h 70 g

EDRE250 – 315 /ERF /NSEDRN250 – 315 /ERF /NS

3000 h 50 g 2000 h 70 g

8.3 Reinforced bearingsIn the /ERF (reinforced bearings) option, cylindrical rolling bearings are installed onthe A-side. The reinforced bearings must have overhung load applied to them andmust never be operated without overhung load.

WARNINGRisk of explosion due to impermissible heating of bearing and motor.Severe or fatal injuries.• Do not operate cylindrical roller bearings without overhung load.

The reinforced bearings are only offered with the /NS (relubrication) option so as to fa-cilitate optimal lubrication of the bearing. Observe the notes on bearing lubrication inchapter "Bearing lubrication for EDRE250 – 280, EDRN225 – 315 motors with re-lubrication device /NS" (→ 2 141).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenanceMotor and brake maintenance – preliminary work


8.4 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work

WARNINGRisk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.Severe or fatal injuries.• Before you start working on the unit, disconnect the motor and all connected op-

tions from the power supply.• Secure the motor against unintended power-up.

8.4.1 Removing rotary encoders from EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motorsThe following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the ES7. rotary en-coder as an example:

[361][34]

[35]

[362]

[220]

[619]

[B]

[367][733]

[A]

3475618443

[34] Tapping screw [367] Retaining screw[35] Fan guard [619] Encoder cover[220] Encoder [733] Screws[361] Extended fan guard [A] Screws[362] Torque arm [B] Cone

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenanceMotor and brake maintenance – preliminary work


Disassembling ES7./AS7.encoders

1. Loosen the screws [34] and remove the safety cover [361].2. Unscrew and remove the connection cover [619]. Do not disconnect the encoder

connection cable.3. Loosen screws [733].4. Loosen the central retaining screw [367] by about 2 to 3 turns and unfasten the

spread shaft cone by tapping lightly on the head of the screw.Keep the cone [B]. It will be needed for re-assembly.

5. Carefully remove the expansion anchor of the torque bracket [362] from the covergrid and the encoder form the rotor.

Re-assembly

1. Attach the expansion anchor at the encoder torque bracket [362] and push the en-coder into the shaft end bore to the stop.

2. Tighten the central retaining screw [367] with a tightening torque of 2.75 Nm.3. Tighten the screw [733] in the expansion anchor with a tightening torque of max.

2.25 Nm.4. Assemble the encoder cover [619] and tighten the screws [A] with a tightening

torque of 2.25 Nm.5. Install the safety cover [361] with the screws [34].

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.4.2 Installing/removing rotary encoders from EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280 motorsThe following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. rotary en-coder as an example:

[706]

[361]

[715] [619][35] [232][1] [220] [657] [707]

[367]

[34]

9007201646566283

[1] Rotor [367] Retaining screw[34] Tapping screw [619] Connection cover[35] Fan guard [657] Canopy[220] Encoder [706] Spacer bolt[232] Screws [707] [715] Screws[361] Extended fan guard [A] Screws

Removing EG7., AG7. encoders

1. For option safety cover: Loosen the screws [34] and remove the protection cover[361]. For option canopy: Loosen the screws [707] and remove the canopy [657].

2. Remove the cable grommet with encoder cable from the protection cover [361].3. Loosen screws [232].4. Loosen the screws [22] and remove the fan guard [35].5. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on encoder [220] and remove the encoder from

the rotor [1].

Re-assembly

1. Place the encoder onto the rotor [1] and attach it in the bore using the central re-taining screw of the encoder [220]. The tightening torque must be 8 Nm.

2. Mount the fan guard [35] and tighten the screw [22]. The tightening torque must be28 Nm.

3. Align the encoder torque bracket [220] to the fan grille and fasten using the screws[232]. The tightening torque must be 6 Nm.

4. Pull the cable of the encoder [220] through the cable grommet [269]. Insert thecable grommet [269] into the protection cover [361].

5. Mount the protection cover [361] and tighten the screws [22] with 28 Nm.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.4.3 Removing the rotary encoders from EDR..160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225 motors with forcedcooling fan option /VE

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. rotary en-coder as an example:

[A]

[170][22]

[269][936]

[934]

[935][232]

[1]

7715961995

[22] Screw [935] Torque arm[170] Forced cooling fan guard [936] Screw[232] Screws [934] Spacer bushing[269] Grommet [A] Encoder

Removing EG7., AG7. encoders

1. Loosen the screws [22] and remove the forced cooling fan guard [170].2. Remove the cable grommet [269] with encoder cable from the forced cooling fan

guard [170].3. Loosen the screws [232] and [936] and remove the torque bracket [935].4. Loosen the retaining screw [220] on the encoder and remove the encoder from the

rotor [1].

Re-assembly

1. Place the encoder onto the rotor [1] and attach it with the central retaining screw ofthe encoder [A]. The tightening torque must be 8 Nm.

2. Place the torque bracket [935] on the spacing bushings [934] and tighten thescrews [936] with 11 Nm.

3. Attach the torque bracket of the encoder [A] to the torque bracket [935] using thescrews [232]. The tightening torque must be 6 Nm.

4. Pull the cable of the encoder [220] through the cable grommet [269]. Insert thecable grommet [269] into the forced cooling fan guard [170].

5. Mount the forced cooling fan guard [170] and tighten the screws [22] with 28 Nm.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.4.4 Removing the rotary encoder from EDR..315, EDRN 315 motorsThe following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EH7. and AH7.rotary encoders as an example:

[657][35] [1] [659]

[220][734]

EH7.

[367]

[220][748]

AH7.

[367]

9007199662370443

[35] Fan guard [659] Screw[220] Encoder [734] Nut[367] Retaining screw [748] Screw[657] Cover plate

Removing EH7. encoders

1. Remove the cover plate [657] by loosening the screws [659].2. Separate the encoder [220] from the fan guard by loosening the nut [734].3. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on the encoder and remove the encoder [220]

from the rotor [1].

Removing AH7. encoders

1. Remove the protection cover [657] by loosening the screws [659].2. Separate the encoder [220] from the fan guard by loosening the screws [748].3. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on the encoder and remove the encoder [220]

from the shaft.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Re-assembly

1. Mount fan guard [35].2. Push the encoder [220] on the shaft and fasten it with the retaining screw [367] ap-

plying a tightening torque according to the following table:

Encoder Tightening torqueEH7. 2.0 Nm

AH7. 3.0 Nm

3. Install screw [748] and nut [734].4. Install the cover plate [657].

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.4.5 Mounting/removing rotary encoders with XV../EV../AV.. mounting adapter for EDR..71 – 225,EDRN80 – 225

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a non-SEW encoderas an example:

[22][220][225][212] [361] / [170][269]

[A] [B][D][E] [232][251]

9007202887906699

[22] Screw [361] Extended fan guard (normal/long)[170] Forced cooling fan guard [269] Grommet[212] Fan guard with encoder mount [A] Adapter[220] Encoder [B] Clamping screw[225] Intermediate flange (not with XV1A) [D] Coupling (spread or solid shaft coupling)[232] Screws (enclosed with XV1A and XV2A) [E] Clamping screw[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed with XV1A and

XV2A)

Removing the XV.., EV.., AV.. encoders

1. Remove the extended fan guard [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170] by loosen-ing the screws [22].

2. Loosen the retaining screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] out-wards.

3. Loosen the clamping screw [E] of the coupling.4. Remove the adapter [A] and the encoder [220].

Re-assembly

1. Proceed as described in Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to EDR.71 –225 motors to mount the encoder.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.4.6 Mounting/removing rotary encoders with XV../EV../AV.. mounting adapter for EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a third-party encoderas an example:

[A][1458]

[233][225]

[226][220]

[251][232]

[269]

[34][33]

[361]

[35]

[22]

[1459]

[1460] [1461] [1462]

[1489]

[1498]

[1497]

[1496]

9007206970704907

[22] Screw [361] Safety cover (normal/long)[33] Washer [1458] Screw[34] Screw [1459] Cage nut[35] Fan guard [1460] Serrated lock washer[220] Encoder [1461] Washer[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [1462] Screw[226] Screw [1489] Ground strap[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A and .V2A) [1496] Serrated lock washer[233] Coupling [1497] Washer[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed

with .V1A and .V2A)[1498] Screw

[269] Grommet [A] Encoder mounting adapter

Removing the encoder mounting adapter

1. Loosen the screws [34] and washers [33] at the extended fan guard. Remove theextended fan guard [361].

2. Remove the encoder. For more details, see chapter "Removing the XV.., EV..,AV.. encoders" (→ 2 149).

3. Loosen the ground strap of the encoder mounting adapter [A] with serrated lockwasher [1496], washers [1497], and screw [1498].

4. Loosen screws [22]. Remove fan guard [35].

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



5. Loosen the encoder mounting adapter [A] with screw [1458] in the encoder bore ofthe rotor and remove it.If the encoder mounting adapter cannot easily be removed: Screw in an M6 setscrew with 20 – 35 mm length into the rotor bore (bore for screw [1458]) andtighten it finger-tight. Screw in a set screw M8 with > 10 mm length or a screw M8with min. 80 mm length into the same bore and push out the encoder mounting ad-apter [A] from the rotor [1]. Then remove the set screw M6 from the rotor again.

Re-assembly

1. Proceed as described in Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to EDR.71 –225 motors to mount the encoder.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.4.7 Mounting/removing rotary encoders with EV../AV../XV.. encoder mounting adapter forEDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motors with forced cooling fan option /VE

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a non-SEW encoderas an example:

[A][934]

[170][22]

[936]

[269][232]

[251][220]

[226]

[225][233]

[1458]

[935][1463]

7715965835

[22] Screw [269] Grommet[170] Forced cooling fan guard [934] Spacer bushing[220] Encoder [935] Torque arm[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [936] Screw[226] Screw [1458] Screw[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A and .V2A) [1463] Screw[233] Coupling [A] Encoder mounting adapter[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed with .V1A

and .V2A)

Removing the encoder mounting adapter

1. Loosen the screws [22] and remove the forced cooling fan guard [170].2. Remove the cable grommet [269] from the fan guard [170].3. Loosen the screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] to the side.

Loosen the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the encoder end and re-move the encoder [220]. The intermediate flange [225] and screws [226] can re-main at the encoder mounting adapter [A].

4. Loosen the screws [1458] and [936] and remove the encoder mounting adapter[A]. The torque brackets [935] and screws [1463] can remain at the encodermounting adapter [A].• If the encoder mounting adapter [A] cannot easily be removed: Screw in a set

screw M6 with 20 – 35 mm length into the rotor bore (bore for screw [1458])and tighten it finger-tight. Screw in a set screw M8 with > 10 mm length or ascrew M8 with min. 80 mm length into the same bore and push out the encodermounting adapter [A] from the rotor [1]. Then remove the set screw M6 from therotor again.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Removing EV.., AV.., and XV. encoders

1. Loosen the screws [22] and remove the forced cooling fan guard [170].2. Remove the cable grommet [269] with encoder cable from the forced cooling fan

guard [170].3. Turn the conical spring washers of the encoder [220] outwards and loosen the

screws [232]. Loosen the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the encoderend.

4. Remove the encoder [220] from the encoder mounting adapter [A] or intermediateflange [225].

Re-assembly

1. Proceed as described in the "Fitting the XV.. encoder mounting adapter onEDR..71 – 225 motors" chapter to mount the encoder.

8.4.8 Mounting the forced cooling fan /VEThe following figure shows a forced cooling fan /VE:

[1]

322163083

[1] Forced cooling fan

1. Observe the operating instructions of the forced cooling fan in chapter Operatingand maintenance instructions for WISTRO forced cooling fan, "Operation andmaintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with part number groups2097... and 2098..." (→ 2 232).

2. Before installing the forced cooling fan [1], check to see that the fan wheel and thefan motor are not damaged.

3. After installation, turn the fan wheel to make sure that the fan wheel does not rubin any place. The clearance between the fan wheel and fixed parts must be atleast 1 mm.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenanceInspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors


8.5 Inspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors8.5.1 Basic structure of EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors

The following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..71 – 132,EDRN80 – 132S motors with cage clamp:

[117]

[118]

[116]

[119]

[122]

[123][132]

[131]

[137]

[262]

[616]

[124]

[129] [134]

[148]

[112]

[111]

[454]

[113]

[452]

[128]

[140]

[139]

[106]

[107]

[103] [93]

[9]

[7]

[12]

[1480]

[109]

[108]

[24]

[16] [41] [22]

[13]

[42]

[30] [35]

[706][715]

[705]

[716]

[707]

[100]

[90]

[2]

[10]

[11]

[3]

[36]

[44]

[32]

[1]

[90]

[91]

[93]

9007202186626955[1] Rotor [36] Fan [113] Pan head screw [139] Hex head screw[2] Retaining ring [41] Shim [116] Terminal clip [140] Lock washer[3] Key [42] B-side endshield [117] Hex head screw [148] Terminal clip[7] Flanged endshield [44] Deep groove ball bearing [118] Lock washer [262] Terminal[9] Screw plug [90] Bed plate [119] Pan head screw [392] Seal[10] Retaining ring [91] Hex nut [122] Tooth lock washer [452] Terminal strip[11] Deep groove ball bearing [93] Countersunk screw [123] Hex head screw [454] Support rail[12] Retaining ring [100] Hex nut [124] Tooth lock washer [616] Retaining plate[13] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Terminal clip [705] Canopy[16] Stator [106] Oil seal [129] Screw plug [706] Spacer[22] Hex head screw [107] Oil flinger [131] Gasket for cover [707] Pan head screw[24] Lifting eyebolt [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover [715] Blind rivet[30] Oil seal [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug [716] Washer[32] Retaining ring [111] Gasket for lower part [137] Screw [1480] O-ring[35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

8Inspection and maintenanceInspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors


8.5.2 Basic structure of EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..160 – 180,EDRN132M – 180 motors with anti-twist frame:

[123]

[124]

[132]

[131 ]

[122]

[1213]

[119]

[112]

[111]

[107]

[2]

[10]

[11]

[31]

[41][44]

[36][32]

[3]

[1]

[104][103]

[90]

[94]

[24]

[22]

[42]

[19]

[30] [30]

[715][705]

[706]

[707]

[108]

[109]

[17]

[93]

[14][15]

[100]

[106]

[7]

[12][9]

[16]

[219]

[118]

[116]

[117]

[129 ]

[134]

[128]

[262]

[616]

[137] [140]

[139]

[390]

9007202221938571[1] Rotor [30] Sealing ring [106] Oil seal [131] Seal for cover[2] Retaining ring [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover[3] Key [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug[7] Flange [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [139] Hex head screw[9] Screw plug [36] Fan [111] Seal for lower part [140] Washer[10] Retaining ring [41] Cup spring [112] Terminal box lower part [390] O-ring[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [219] Hex nut[12] Retaining ring [44] Deep groove ball bearing [117] Stud [705] Canopy[14] Washer [90] Foot [118] Washer [706] Spacer[15] Hex head screw [91] Hex nut [119] Cap screw [707] Hex head screw[16] Stator [93] Washer [122] Tooth lock washer [715] Hex head screw[17] Hex nut [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [1213] Kit 1)

[19] Cap screw [100] Hex nut [124] Tooth lock washer[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer[24] Lifting eyebolt [104] Supporting ring [129] Screw plug1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.5.3 Basic structure of EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 – 225 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..200 – 225,EDRN200 – 225 motors with anti-twist frame:

[390]

[123][124]

[132][131 ]

[122][1213]

[119]

[112][111]

[129]

[219]

[118]

[116]

[117]

[128] [140]

[139]

[134]

[109][108]

[16]

[105][9]

[7]

[107]

[106]

[103][100]

[93]

[93]

[90]

[24]

[42] [22]

[19]

[26][25]

[30][35]

[715]

[706]

[707][705]

[2]

[11]

[3]

[1]

[31]

[21][44]

[43][40]

[36] [32]

9007202310009099[1] Rotor [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [131] Seal for cover[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover[3] Key [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [132] Terminal box cover[7] Flange [36] Fan [111] Seal for lower part [134] Screw plug[9] Screw plug [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [140] Washer[15] Cap screw [43] Supporting ring [117] Stud [390] O-ring[16] Stator [44] Deep groove ball bearing [118] Washer [219] Hex nut[19] Cap screw [90] Foot [119] Cap screw [705] Canopy[21] Oil seal flange [93] Washer [122] Tooth lock washer [706] Spacer bolt[22] Hex head screw [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [707] Hex head screw[24] Lifting eyebolt [100] Hex nut [124] Tooth lock washer [715] Hex head screw[25] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [1213] Kit 1)

[26] Shield ring [105] Cup spring [129] Screw plug[30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [131] Seal for cover1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.5.4 Basic structure of EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..250 – 280,EDRN250 – 280 motors with anti-twist frame:

[115]

[114]

[113]

[111]

[112]

[122]

[119] [131]

[124]

[123]

[132] [219]

[117][118]

[116]

[128]

[140][139]

[1453]

[162][161]

[129]

[134][159]

[160]

[1457][15]

[143]

[144]

[9]

[42] [19]

[26][25]

[30]

[35][22]

[24][108]

[109]

[705] [715]

[706]

[707]

[105]

[100][103]

[7]

[106][107] [90]

[93][94]

[16]

[2]

[11][3]

[1]

[31]

[44][43]

[40][36]

[32]

[21]

14397384075[1] Rotor [35] Fan guard [111] Seal for lower part [134] Screw plug[2] Retaining ring [36] Fan [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw[3] Key [40] Retaining ring [113] Cap screw [140] Washer[7] Flange [42] Rear endshield [114] Tooth lock washer [143] Adapter plate[9] Screw plug [43] Supporting ring [115] Kit 1) [144] Cap screw[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball bearing [116] Serrated lock washer [159] Connection piece[15] Cap screw [90] Foot [117] Stud [160] Connection piece seal[16] Stator [93] Washer [118] Washer [161] Hex head screw[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [119] Cap screw [162] Tooth lock washer[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [122] Tooth lock washer [219] Hex nut[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy[24] Lifting eyebolt [105] Compression spring [124] Tooth lock washer [706] Spacer bolt[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [128] Serrated lock washer [707] Hex head screw[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [129] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [131] Seal for cover [1457] Set screw[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [132] Terminal box cover [1453] Screw plug[32] Retaining ring1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.5.5 Basic structure of EDR..315, EDRN315 motorsThe following figure shows an example of the basic structure of EDR..315, EDRN315with anti-twist frame:

[115]

[114]

[113]

[111]

[112]

[122]

[119]

[131]

[132]

[124]

[123]

[117][116]

[118][219]

[128]

[140]

[139]

[160]

[162][161]

[129] [159]

[134]

[15][16]

[143]

[144]

[9]

[107][106][250]

[103]

[100]

[7]

[105][604]

[608][609]

[90] [93]

[94]

[109]

[108]

[24] [42][19]

[26][25]

[30]

[705][715]

[706]

[707]

[2]

[11]

[3]

[1]

[31]

[21]

[44][43]

[40]

[36]

[32]

[35][22]

[94][93][90]

9007213690531979[1] Rotor [35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer[2] Retaining ring [36] Fan [113] Cap screw [143] Adapter plate[3] Key [40] Retaining ring [114] Tooth lock washer [144] Cap screw[7] Flange [42] Rear endshield [115] Kit 1) [159] Connection piece[9] Screw plug [43] Supporting ring [116] Serrated lock washer [160] Connection piece seal[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball bearing [117] Stud [161] Hex head screw[15] Cap screw [90] Foot [118] Washer [162] Tooth lock washer[16] Stator [93] Washer [119] Cap screw [219] Hex nut[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [122] Tooth lock washer [250] Oil seal[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [604] Lubrication ring[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [124] Tooth lock washer [608] Oil seal flange[24] Lifting eyebolt [105] Cup spring [128] Serrated lock washer [609] Oil seal[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [129] Screw plug [705] Canopy[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [131] Seal for cover [706] Spacer bolt[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover [707] Hex head screw[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw[32] Retaining ring [111] Seal for lower part [139] Hex head screw1) 1 anti-twist frame, 1 terminal board, 4 sleeves, 2 screws, 2 nuts)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.5.6 Inspection steps for EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motor

WARNINGRisk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.Severe or fatal injuries.• Disconnect the motor and all connected options from the power supply before

you start working.• Secure the motor against unintended power-up.

1. With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.Remove pinion and oil flinger [107].

2. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor andbrake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).

3. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36].4. Remove stator:

• EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: Remove cap screws [13] fromflanged endshield [7] and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] fromflanged endshield [7].

• EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180 motors: Loosen cap screws [19] and re-move B-side endshield [42]. Loosen hexagon screw [15] and remove statorfrom flanged endshield.

• EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 motors– Loosen hexagon screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the

stator.– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with the

B-side endshield [42].– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side

endshield [42].• EDR..250 – 280, EDRN225 – 280 motors without /ERF or /NS option

– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7].– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the B-side endshield [42] together with

the rotor [1].– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the B-side endshield [42] from the rotor

[1].• EDR..250 – 280, EDRN225 – 280 motors with /ERF or /NS option, or EDR../

EDRN315– Unfasten cap screws [19] and [25], and remove B-side endshield [42].– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7] together with the rotor [1].

Option /ERF: Equally pull on rotor [1] and flange [7].– Loosen hex head screws [609] and remove the flange [7] from the rotor [1].– Before disassembly, protect the oil seal seat from damage using masking

tape or a protective sleeve.5. Visual inspection: Is there any moisture or gear unit oil inside the stator?

• If not, proceed with step 7• If there is moisture, proceed with step 6.23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017



• If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop.6. If there is moisture inside the stator:

• With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.• With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange• Remove the rotor [1].• Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the elec-

tric cylinder" (→ 2 32).7. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types, see

chapter "Permitted rolling bearings" (→ 2 208)8. EDR..250 – 280, EDRN225 – 280 motors with /ERF or /NS option, or with EDR../

EDRN315 motors• Fill the rolling bearing with grease until it is two-thirds full, see chapter "Bearing

lubrication" (→ 2 141).• Notice: Place the oil seal flange [608] and [21] onto the rotor shaft before in-

stalling the bearings.• Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.• Place the springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the

flange [7].• Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide it into the flange [7].• Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head bolts [609].

9. Reseal the shaft:• A-side: Replace the oil seal [106].• B-side: Replace the oil seal [30].

Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klüber Petamo GHY 133).10. Reseal the stator seat:

• Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound (operating temper-ature -40 to +180 °C), such as "SEW L Spezial".

• For EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: Replace seal [392].• For EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: Change O-ring [1480] if it is de-

formed or damaged. As an alternative, use e.g. "SEW L Spezial" instead of theO-ring.

11. Install the motor and options.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenanceInspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 brakemotor


8.6 Inspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 brakemotor8.6.1 Basic structure EDR..71 – 80, EDRN80 brakemotors

[157][66][718][49][68][70][42][46][1] [71]

[64][95]

[61][47]

[51][32]

[65][67]

[60]

[50] / [276] [54]

[62]

[59] [53] [56] [57] [58] [36] [22] [35]

18929759755

[1] Motor [54] Magnet body, complete1) [67] Counter spring1)

[22] Hex head screw [56] Stud [68] Brake disc1)

[32] Retaining ring [57] Conical spring [70] Driver[35] Fan guard [58] Hex nut [71] Key[36] Fan wheel [59] Parallel pin [95] Sealing ring[42] Brake endshield1) [60] Stud1) [157] Clamping strap[46] Clamp [61] Hex nut1) [276] Brake spring (blue)1)

[47] O-ring [62] Retaining ring (EDR..80, EDRN80 mo-tors)

[550] Pre-assembled brake

[49] Pressure plate1) [64] Set screw (/HF) [718] Damping plate1)

[50] Brake spring (normal)1) [65] Pressure ring1)

[51] Hand lever (/HR) [66] Sealing strip1)

[53] Releasing lever1) Part of "Brake (pre-assembled) [550]"

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenanceInspection/maintenance work EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 brakemotor


8.6.2 Basic structure of EDR..90 – 132, EDRN90 – 132S brakemotor[32][36][51][64][53][59][95][47][70][42][71][46][1] [157]

[22] [55][35][57] [58][56]

[900][550][62][901]

18014398689463947

[1] Motor [56] Stud [71] Key[22] Hex head screw [57] Conical spring [95] Sealing ring[32] Retaining ring [58] Hex nut [157] Clamping strap[35] Fan guard [59] Parallel pin [550] Pre-assembled brake[36] Fan wheel [62] Retaining ring [900] Screw[42] Brake endshield [64] Set screw (/HF) [901] Gasket[46] Clamp [70] Driver[47] O-ring[51] Hand lever (/HR)[53] Releasing lever[55] Fan guard closing piece (EDR..112 –

132, EDRN112 – 132S motors)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.3 Basic structure of EDR..160 – 315, EDRN132M – 315 brakemotor

[57] [255] [256] [58]

[31][901][71][42][46]

[550] [900] [157] [95]

[55][35][22][32][36][51][64][53]

BE120/122

BE11-62

[698] [47] [56]

[58][57]

[58][70][418][390][1]

18932069899

[1] Motor with brake endshield [53] Releasing lever [95] Sealing ring[22] Hex head screw [55] Closing piece [157] Clamping strap[31] Key [56] Stud [255] Conical seat[32] Retaining ring [57] Conical spring [256] Spherical washer[35] Fan guard [58] Hex nut [390] O-ring (EDR..160 – 225, EDRN132M –

225 motors)[36] Fan [58] Adjusting nut [418] Cable gland[42] Brake endshield [62] Retaining ring [550] Pre-assembled brake[46] Clamp [64] Set screw (/HF) [698] Connector complete (BE20-BE122)[47] O-ring [70] Driver [900] Screw[51] Hand lever [71] Key [901] O-ring/seal (EDR..160 – 225,

EDRN132M – 225 motors)[1607] O-ring (EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 –

280 motors)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.4 Inspection steps for EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors



1. With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit. Remove pinion and oil flinger [107].

2. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed. See chapter "Motorand brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).

3. Remove the fan guard with encoder mount [212] or fan guard [35] and the fanwheel [36].

4. EDR..90 – 315, EDRN90 – 315 motors: Remove the brake cpl. [550] (if applic-able) with mounted /HR, /HF option manual brake release.• BE05 – 11: Remove terminal box cover, loosen brake cable and microswitch

supply cable of the /DUB option from the terminals.• BE20 – 122: Loosen safety screws of the brake plug connector [698] and re-

move plug connector.• Loosen screws [900], press brake [550] off the endshield [42], and carefully lift

off the brake.5. Remove stator:

• EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: Remove cap screws [13] fromflanged endshield [7] and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] fromflanged endshield [7].

• EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180 motors: Loosen cap screws [19] and re-move B-side endshield [42]. Loosen hexagon screw [15] and remove statorfrom flanged endshield.

• EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 motors– Loosen hexagon screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the

stator.– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with the

B-side endshield [42].– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side

endshield [42].• EDR..250 – 280, EDRN225 – 280 motors without /ERF or /NS option

– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7].– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the B-side endshield [42] together with

the rotor [1].– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the B-side endshield [42] from the rotor

[1].• EDR..250 – 280, EDRN225 – 280 motors with /ERF or /NS option, or EDR../

EDRN315 motors– Unfasten cap screws [19] and [25], and remove B-side endshield [42].– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7] together with the rotor [1].

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Option /ERF: Equally pull on rotor [1] and flange [7].– Loosen hex head screws [609] and remove the flange [7] from the rotor [1].– Before disassembly, preferably protect the oil seal seat from damage using

adhesive tape or a protective sleeve.6. Pull the stator back by about 3 to 4 cm.7. Visual inspection: Is there any moisture or gear unit oil inside the stator?

• If not, proceed with step 10.• If there is moisture, proceed with step 9.• If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop.

8. If there is moisture inside the stator:• With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit• With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange• Remove the rotor [1].• Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the elec-

tric cylinder" (→ 2 32).9. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types, see

chapter "Permitted rolling bearings" (→ 2 208)10. Remove retaining ring [62]. Preheat the driver [70] and remove it using suitable

tools. Remove key [71].11. Install key [71] and driver [70]:

• Preheat the driver to allow for easier installation (joining temperature +85 °C to+115 °C).

• EDR..71 motors: Clean the driver seat at the rotor [1] before installation. Gluein the driver using Loctite 648 or Loctite 649. Observe the correct fit to rollingbearing [44].

• EDR..80 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors: Clean the driver at the rotor [1] andcoat with anti-corrosion agent NOCO® fluid before fitting. Then mount retainingring [62].

12. Seal the stator again and install it:• EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: Replace seal [392]• EDR..160 – 315, EDRN132M – 315 motors: Seal the sealing surfaces with

duroplastic sealing compound (operating temperature -40 to +180 °C), such as"SEW L-Spezial".

13. EDR..250 – 280, EDRN225 – 280 motors with /ERF or /NS option, or with EDR../EDRN315 motors• Fill the rolling bearing with grease until it is two-thirds full, see chapter "Bearing

lubrication" (→ 2 141).• Notice: Place the oil seal flange [608], [21] onto the rotor shaft before installing

the bearings.• Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.• Place the springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the

flange [7].• Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide it into the flange [7].• Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head screws

[609].

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



• Screw in the stator [16] and flange [7] with screws [15].Notice: Protect the winding overhang from damage.

• Before mounting the B-side endshield, screw in the M8 set screw (approxim-ately 200 mm) into the oil seal flange [21].

• Before mounting the B-side endshield [42], insert the set screw in through abore for the screw [25]. Screw B-side endshield to stator [16] using cap screws[19] and hex nuts [17]. Lift the oil seal flange [21] with the setscrew, and fastenusing 2 screws [25]. Remove the setscrew and screw in the remaining screws[25].

• Renew oil seals.– A-side: Replace oil seals [106], for gearmotors replace the oil flinger [107]

and oil seal [250].With gearmotors, fill about two-thirds of the space between the two oil sealswith suitable grease, see chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-cor-rosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 211).

– B-side: Insert the oil seal [30], and coat the sealing lip with suitable grease.14. Reseal the shaft:

• A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]• B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]

Apply suitable grease to the sealing lip, see chapter "Order information for lub-ricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 211).

15. Seal the friction disk of the brake [550] again at the brake endshield [42]:• EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S motors: Replace seal [901]• EDR..160 – 280, EDRN132M – 280 motors: Replace O-ring [901] or [1607].• EDR..315, EDRN315 motors: Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing

compound (operating temperature -40 °C to +180 °C), such as "SEW LSpezial".

16. Reinstall the brake [550]: Insert the brake cable into the terminal box when in-stalling the brake. Install the brake. Observe the alignment of the brake. (Cams atthe endshield, manual brake release position).• EDR..71 – 80, EDRN80 motors: Install cap screws [13]. Tightening torque:

5 Nm• EDR..90 – 315, EDRN90 – 315 motors: Install cap screws [900].

EDR.. 90 – 100 112 – 160 180 200 – 225 250 – 315EDRN.. 90 – 100 112 – 132 160 – 180 200 – 225 250 – 315Tightening torque 10.3 Nm 25.5 Nm 50 Nm 87.3 Nm 230 Nm

17. Connect the brake connection cable.• BE05 – 11: Reconnect the brake cable according to the wiring diagram.• BE20 – 122: Plug in the brake plug connector [698] again. Tighten the retaining

screws again (tightening torque: 3 Nm)18. For BE05 – 11, seal the sealing ring seat using SEW-L-Spezial. Additionally install

O-rings [47] for design with manual brake release /HF and /HR.19. Coat a new sealing ring [95] with a grease suitable for EPP material and fit in the

sealing ring seat, see chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-corrosionagents and sealants" (→ 2 211). 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017



20. Install the fan wheel [36] and the fan guard [35] or fan guard with encoder mount[212]. Install available optional equipment.

21. With gearmotors: Replace oil flinger [107] and install the pinion.

8.6.5 Basic structure of BE05 – 2 brakes[67] [65] [718] [54] [60][42] [61][73]

[50]/[276][49][68] [66]

27021598292600715

[42] Brake endshield [61] Hex nut [73] Niro sheet metal[49] Pressure plate [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [718] Damping plate[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring[60] Stud [68] Brake disk

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.6 Basic structure of BE05 – 20 brakes

[50]/[276]/[1312][49]

[61][702] [60][54][718][65][67]

[69] [68]

[63][73] [66]

36028797193166603

[49] Pressure plate [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [702] Friction disk[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring [718] Damping plate (BE05 – 11)[60] Stud [68] Brake disk [1312] Brake spring (white)[61] Hex nut [69] Circular spring/clasp (BE5 – 20)[63] Pole sheet [73] Niro sheet metal

8.6.7 Basic structure of BE30, 60, 120 brakes[702] [68] [28][54] [61][67] [49] [60][69]

[50]/[276] [66][63]

18234907019

[28] Closing cap [61] Hex nut [69] Circular spring[49] Pressure plate [63] Pole sheet [276] Brake spring (blue)[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [702] Friction disk[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Setting sleeve[60] Stud [68] Complete brake disk 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017



8.6.8 Basic structure of BE32, 62, 122 brakes[702] [61][67] [60][50] / [276][68b][69b]

[66][28][63][49][52][68a][69a] [54]

18234909451

[28] Closing cap [61] Hex nut [69a] Circular spring[49] Pressure plate [63] Pole sheet [69b] Circular spring[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [276] Brake spring (blue)[52] Brake plate complete [67] Setting sleeve [702] Friction disk[54] Magnet body, complete [68a] Complete brake disk[60] Stud [68b] Complete brake disk

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.9 Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122 brakes



1. Remove the following:• Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter Motor

and brake maintenance – preliminary work.• Flange cover or fan guard [35]

2. Push the sealing strip [66] aside,• loosen the clamping straps [157]• suck off any abrasion

3. Measure the brake disk [68]:• Minimum brake disk thickness, see chapter Technical data.• If necessary, replace brake disk according to chapter "Replacing the brake disk

of BE05 – BE122 brakes" (→ 2 171).4. BE30 – 122: Unfasten the setting sleeve [67] by turning it towards the B-side end-

shield.5. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)

(use a feeler gauge and measure at three points offset by 120°):• BE05 – 11: between pressure plate [49] and damping plate [718]• BE20 – 122: between pressure plate [49] and magnet body [54]

A

120°

120°

120°

1

23

18014398689460619 2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



• BE05 – 20: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is set correctly,see chapter Work done, working air gap, brake disk thickness.

• BE30 – 122: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is 0.05 – 0.1 mm smaller than the desired setting value (for default values, see chapterWork done, working air gap, brake disk thickness).

• If you are mounting the BE32, BE62 and BE122 in a vertical mounting position,set the 3 springs of the brake plate [52] to the following dimension X:

X in mmMounting position BE32 BE62 BE122Brake at the top 7.3 10.0 10.0

Brake at the bottom 7.3 10.0 10.0

X

X

[49]

[52]

[900]

[68b][68b]

[68a]

27021598220181131

6. BE30 – 122: Screw the setting sleeves [67] to the magnet body until the workingair gap is correctly set, see chapter Technical data.

7. Check sealing strip [66] for plastic deformation and other damage. Replace thesealing strip if necessary. Install clamping strap [157] again, make sure the sealingstrip and clamping strap are positioned correctly.

8. Seal the hex nuts [61] of the brake again, using the duroplastic sealing compoundSEW-L-Spezial.

9. Install the remaining removed motor parts again:

8.6.10 Replacing the brake disk of BE05 – BE122 brakesIn addition to the brake elements listed in column "BE brake" (see chapter Inspectionand maintenance intervals), check the hex nuts [61] for wear when you replace thebrake disk. You must always replace the hex nuts [61] when you replace the brakedisk.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17





INFORMATION• The brake of EDR..71 – 80, EDRN80 motors cannot be removed from the motor

because the /BE brake is directly installed on the brake endshield of the motor.• The brake of EDR..90 – 315, EDRN90 – 315 motors can be removed from the

motor for replacing the brake disk because the /BE brake is pre-installed on thebrake endshield of the motor with a friction disk.

1. Remove the following:• Forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor and

brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Flange cover or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan [36]

2. Remove the brake cable• BE05 – 11: Loosen the terminal box cover and unfasten the brake cable from

the rectifier.• BE20 – 122: Loosen safety screws of the brake plug connector [698] and re-

move plug connector.3. Remove the clamping strap [157] and sealing strip [66].4. Remove manual brake release if necessary.

• Adjusting nuts [58], conical springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], conicalseat [255], spherical washer [256]

5. Loosen the hex nuts [61], carefully pull off the magnet body [54] (brake cable!) andtake out the brake springs [50]/[276]/[1312].

6. BE05 – 11: Remove the damping plate [718], pressure plate [49] and brake disk[68]BE20, BE30, BE60, BE120: Remove the pressure plate [49], pole sheet [63] andbrake disk [68]BE32, BE62, BE122: Remove the pressure plate [49], brake disk [68a] and [68b],as well as the brake plate [52].

7. Clean the brake components.8. Install new brake disk(s).9. Brake parts are installed as described in chapter "Inspection steps for EDR..71 –

315, EDRN80 – 315 motors" (→ 2 164).• Use the new hex nuts [61] and clean the contact surfaces of the nuts at the

magnet body of any potentially present sealing compound.• Except for the fan [36] and the fan guard [35], because the working air gap has

to be set first, see chapter "Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122brakes" (→ 2 170).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



• After the working air gap is set, make sure the areas at sealing strip [66] andhex nuts [61] are correctly sealed.

10. In case of manual brake release: Use the adjusting nuts to adjust the floatingclearance "s" between the conical springs (pressed flat) and the adjusting nuts(see chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release" (→ 2 181).

WARNINGNo braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s".Severe or fatal injuries.• Make sure the floating clearance "s" is correctly set, so that the pressure plate

can move up as the brake lining wears.


INFORMATIONAfter replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque is reached only after sev-eral cycles.

8.6.11 Changing the braking torque of BE120 – BE122 brakesThe braking torque can be altered in stages,• By changing the type and number of brake springs.• By changing the brakeFor the possible braking torque steps, refer to chapter Technical data.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.12 Changing the brake spring of BE05 – BE122 brakes



1. Remove the following:• Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor

and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32]/[62] and fan

[36]2. Remove the brake cable.

• BE05 – 11: Remove the terminal box cover. Remove the brake cable from therectifier.

• BE20 – 122: Loosen the locking screws of the brake plug connector [698]. Re-move the plug connector.

3. Remove the clamping strap [157] and sealing strip [66].4. Remove manual brake release if necessary.

• Setting nuts [58], conical springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], conicalseat [255], spherical washer [256]

5. Unfasten the hex nuts [61] and pull off the magnet body [54]• By approx. 50 mm (watch the brake cable)

6. Replace or add brake springs [50/276/1312]• Arrange brake springs symmetrically

7. Brake parts are installed as described in chapter "Inspection steps for EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motors" (→ 2 164).• Use the new hex nuts [61] and clean the contact surfaces of the nuts at the




8. In case of manual brake release: Use the setting nuts to adjust the floating clear-ance "s" between the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (seechapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release" (→ 2 181)).


can move up as the brake lining wears. 2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17




INFORMATIONReplace the setting sleeves [58] if the removal procedure is repeated.

8.6.13 Changing the magnet body of BE05 – BE122 brakes



1. Remove the following:• Forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor and

brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Flange cover or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan [36]

2. Remove the brake cable.• BE05 – 11: Remove the terminal box cover. Remove the brake cable from the

rectifier.• BE20 – 122: Loosen the locking screws of the brake plug connector [698]. Re-

move the plug connector.3. Remove the clamping strap [157] and sealing strip [66].4. Loosen hex nuts [61], remove complete magnet body [54], remove brake springs

[50]/[276]/[1312].5. Install new magnet body with brake springs. For the possible braking torque steps,

refer to chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 186).6. Brake parts are installed as described in chapter Inspection steps EDR..71 – 315,

EDRN80 – 315 brakemotor.• Use the new hex nuts [61] and clean the contact surfaces of the nuts at the




7. In case of manual brake release: Use the adjusting nuts to adjust the floatingclearance "s" between the conical springs (pressed flat) and the adjusting nuts(see chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release" (→ 2 181).

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17





8. Install the remaining removed motor parts again:9. Replace the brake control in the event of an interturn short circuit or a short circuit

to frame.

INFORMATIONReplace the setting sleeves [58] if the removal procedure is repeated.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.14 Brake replacement for EDR..71 – 80, EDRN80 motors




and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan [36]

2. Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable from the rectifier. If ne-cessary, attach trailing wire to brake cables.

3. Loosen cap screws [13] and remove brake endshield with brake from stator.4. Insert the brake cable of the new brake into the terminal box.5. Install the cap screws [13] again. Tightening torque 5 Nm.6. Install the new brake, observing the alignment of the cams of the brake endshield

[42].7. Seal sealing ring seat using SEW-L-Spezial. Additionally install O-rings [47] for

design with manual brake release /HF and /HR.8. Reseal the shaft:

• Replace the sealing ring [95]• Coat the sealing lip with a grease suitable for EPP material and fit in the sealing

ring seat, see chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-corrosion agentsand sealants" (→ 2 211).

9. Remove the clamping strap [157] of the old brake and attach it to the sealing strip[66] of the new brake. Make sure the clamping strap sealing strip is positioned cor-rectly.




11. Install removed motor parts again.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.15 Brake replacement for EDR..90 – 225, EDRN90 – 225 motors




and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan

[36].2. Remove the brake cable.

• BE05 – 11: Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable fromthe rectifier.

• BE20 – 62: Loosen safety screws of the brake plug connector [698] and re-move plug connector.

3. Unfasten screws [900] and remove brake from brake endshield. Replace gasket/sealing ring [901].

4. EDR..90 – 132, EDRN90 – 132S motors: Pay attention to the alignment of thegasket [901].

5. Connect the brake cables of the new brake.• BE20 – 62: Insert and screw tight the brake plug connector [698]. Tightening

torque 3 Nm.6. Install the new brake, observing the alignment of the cams of the friction disk.7. Install the cap screws [900] again. Observe the following tightening torques:

EDR.. 90 to 100 112 to 160 180 200 to 225EDRN.. 90 to 100 112 to 132 160 to 180 200 to 225Tightening torque 10.3 Nm 25.5 Nm 50 Nm 87.3 Nm

8. Seal sealing ring seat using SEW-L-Spezial. Additionally install O-rings [47] fordesign with manual brake release /HF and /HR.

9. Reseal the shaft:• Replace the sealing ring [95]• Coat the sealing lip with a grease suitable for EPP material and fit in the sealing



11. In case of manual brake release: Use the setting nuts to adjust the floating clear-ance "s" between the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (seechapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release" (→ 2 181)). 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017






2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.16 Brake replacement for EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 motors




and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan [36]

2. Loosen safety screws of the brake plug connector [698] and remove plug con-nector.

3. Unfasten screws [900] and remove brake from brake endshield.• EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280 motors: Replace O ring [1607].

4. Install the new brake, observing the alignment of the cams of the friction disk.5. Insert and screw tight the brake plug connector [698]. Tightening torque 3 Nm.6. Install the cap screws [900] again. Tightening torque: 230 Nm7. Reseal the shaft:

• Replace the sealing ring [95]• Coat the sealing lip with a grease suitable for EPP material and fit in the sealing







2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



8.6.17 Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release



1. Remove the following:• Remove forced cooling fan and incremental encoder, if installed, see chapter

"Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan [36]

2. Installing manual brake release:• BE05 – BE11:

– Remove old sealing ring [95].– Place O-ring [47] into magnet body.– Seal sealing ring seat using SEW-L-Spezial.– Screw in and glue studs [56], insert sealing ring for manual brake release

[95] and hammer in parallel pin [59].– Mount releasing lever [53], conical coil springs [57] and setting nuts [58].

• BE20 – BE62:– Place O-ring [47] into magnet body.– Screw in and glue in stud [56].– Mount releasing lever [53], conical coil springs [57] and setting nuts [58].

• BE120 – BE122:– Place O-ring [47] into magnet body.– Screw in and glue in stud [56].– Mount releasing lever [53], conical springs [57], conical seat [255], spherical

washer [256], and adjusting nuts [58].

WARNINGNo braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s".Severe or fatal injuries.• Correctly set floating clearance "s", so that the pressure plate can move up as

the brake lining wears.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



3. Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between the conical coil springs(pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see the following figure).

s

177241867

Brake Floating clearance smm

BE05, BE1, BE2, 1.5

BE5 1.7

BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62,BE120, BE122

2

4. Reinstall the removed parts.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenanceAltering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop


8.7 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop

8.7.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors with backstop[35][36][77][75][74][48][42][392][44][1][71] [78]

[41] [32][62] [37]

18014399652340235

[1] Motor with brakemotor [48] Spacing ring (only DR../DRN/DR2..80)[32] Retaining ring [62] Retaining ring (only DR../DRN/DR2..80)[35] Fan guard [71] Key[36] Fan wheel [74] Backstop[37] Sealing ring [75] Sealing flange[41] Equalizing ring [77] Cap screw[42] Backstop endshield, complete [78] Direction of rotation information sign[44] Deep groove ball bearing [392] Seal

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8 Inspection and maintenanceAltering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop


8.7.2 Basic structure of DR..90 – 315, DRN63, 90 – 315, DR2..63 motors with backstop[78][32][37][62][74][48][30][71][42][392][1] [703] [55]

[901] [376] [1406] [702] [36] [35]

[1607][390]

18014399652338315

[1] Motor [74] Backstop[30] Sealing ring (DR../DRN250-315) [78] Information sign for direction of rotation[32] Retaining ring[35] Fan guard [702] Backstop housing[36] Fan wheel [703] Cap screw[37] Sealing ring [376] Screw plug (DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315)[42] Brake endshield [392] O-ring (with DRN63, DR..63)

Seal (DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S)[48] Spacing ring [901] Seal (DR..90 – 225, DRN90 – 225)[55] Closing piece (from DR../DRN112) [1406] Spacing ring (DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315)[62] Retaining ring (from DR../DRN90) [1607] O-ring (DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280)[71] Key

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

8Inspection and maintenanceAltering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop


8.7.3 Changing the blocking direction



Proceed as follows to change the blocking direction:1. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed.

See chapter "Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 143).2. Remove flange cover or fan guard [35]3. DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Remove the sealing flange [75].

DR..90 – 315, DRN63, 90 – 315, DR2..63 motors: Completely remove the back-stop housing [702].

4. Loosen retaining ring [62] and spacer [1406] (if necessary).5. Remove the sprag ring [74] via screws in the forcing threads or using a puller.6. Spacing ring [48], if provided, remains installed.7. Turn around wedge element ring [74], check the old grease and replace according

to the specifications below and reinstall the wedge element ring.DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors: Glue in sprag ring [74] with Loctite 648/649.

8. Install retaining ring [62].9. DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Apply SEW-L-Spezial to the

sealing flange [75] and install it. Replace sealing ring [37] if necessary.DR..90 – 315, DRN63, 90 – 315, DR2..63 motors: Replace seal [901] and [1607].Also replace seal [37] if necessary. Completely install the backstop housing [702].

10. Reinstall the removed parts.11. Replace the label [78] indicating the direction of rotation.

Lubricating the backstopThe backstop is greased at the factory with the corrosion protection low-viscositygrease LBZ 1. If you want to use another grease, make sure it complies with NLGIclass 00/000 with a base oil viscosity of 42 mm2/s at 40 °C on a lithium saponified andmineral oil base. The application temperature range is from -50 °C to +90 °C. See thefollowing table for the amount of grease required:

DR.. motors 71 80 90/100 112/132 160 180 200/225 250/280 315DRN.. motors 63/71 80 90/100 112/132S 132M/L 160/180 200/225 250/280 315DR2.. motors 63/71 80 – – – – – – –Amount of greasein g

9 11 15 20 30 45 80 80 120

The tolerance regarding the grease level is ± 30%.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataBraking torques


9 Technical data

9.1 Braking torquesTable shows the possible braking torque combinations for various sizes of the BE..brake. .

WARNINGInsufficient or too high braking torque due to impermissible spring pack.Severe or fatal injuries.• Maintenance work may only be performed by a trained specialists.• In case of a conversion, make sure the new braking torque stage is approved for

your individual drive combination, and suitable for your application.

Brake Part number Damping plate

[718]1) Pole sheet [63]2)

Braking torque settingsBraking torque Type and number of brake springs Purchase order numbers for

brake springsNm Normal [50] Blue [276] White [1312] normal Blue/white

BE05 137405631) 3.5 – 6 – 0135017X 137413732.5 – 4 –1.8 – 3 –

BE1 137405631) 7.0 4 2 – 0135017X 137413735.0 3 – –

BE2 137401991) 14 2 4 – 13740245 1374052010 2 2 –7.0 – 4 –5.0 – 3 –

BE5 137406951) 40 2 4 – 13740709 1374071728 2 2 –20 – – 6 1374773814 – – 4

BE11 137417131) 80 2 4 – 13741837 1374184555 2 2 –40 – 4 –

137417131)+137469952)

28 – 3 –20 – – 4 13747789

BE20 – 150 4 2 – 13743228 13742485– 110 3 3 –– 80 3 – –

137493072)+137467581)

55 – 6 –40 – 4 –

BE30 – 200 4 4 – 01874551 13744356– 150 4 – –– 100 – 8 –

137494552) 75 – 6 –BE32 – 400 4 4 – 01874551 13744356

– 300 4 – –– 200 – 8 –

137494551) 150 – 6 –137494551) 100 – 4 –

BE60 – 400 4 4 – 01868381 13745204– 300 4 – –– 200 – 8 –

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataBraking torques


Brake Part number Damping plate

[718]1) Pole sheet [63]2)

Braking torque settingsBraking torque Type and number of brake springs Purchase order numbers for

brake springsNm Normal [50] Blue [276] White [1312] normal Blue/white

BE62 – 800 4 4 – 01868381 13745204– 600 4 – –– 400 – 8 –

BE120 – 800 6 2 – 13608770 13608312– 600 4 4 –– 400 4 – –

BE122 – 1600 6 2 – 13608770 13608312– 1200 4 4 –– 800 4 – –

1) Damping plate2) Pole sheet

The following table shows the brake spring layout:BE05 – 11:

6 springs 3 + 3 springs 4 + 2 springs 2 + 2 springs 4 springs 3 springs

BE20:6 springs 4 + 2 springs 3 + 3 springs 4 springs 3 springs

BE30 – 122:8 springs 4 + 4 springs 6 + 2 springs 6 springs 4 springs

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataWork done, working air gap, brake disk thickness


9.2 Work done, working air gap, brake disk thicknessIf you use encoders and brakes with functional safety, the values for the maximumworking air gaps and the work done until maintenance are reduced. For the new val-ues, refer to the addendums to the operating instructions for safety brakes and safetyencoders.

Brake Switching energyuntil maintenance

1)

Working air gap Brake diskmin.2) Max. min.

106 J mm mm mmBE05 120 0.25 0.6 11.0

BE1 120 0.25 0.6 11.0

BE2 180 0.25 0.6 11.0

BE5 390 0.25 0.9 11.0

BE11 640 0.3 1.2 12.5

BE20 1000 0.3 1.2 12.5

BE30 1500 0.3 1.2 12.5

BE32 1500 0.4 1.2 12.5

BE60 2500 0.3 1.2 14.0

BE62 2500 0.4 1.2 14.0

BE120 390 0.6 1.2 14.0

BE122 300 0.8 1.2 14.01) The specified values are nominal values that were determined during rating operation. The actual switching energy that can be

reached before maintenance may vary depending on the actual load during operation.2) When checking the working air gap, note: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rise to deviations of ±0.15 mm after a

test run.

INFORMATIONIn case of drives with BE32, BE62, or BE122 brake in pivoted mounting position, thespecified value may be reduced by up to 50%, depending on the pivoting angle.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataOperating currents


9.3 Operating currentsThe depicted values apply to a supply with nominal voltage and the standard temper-ature range of -20 to +40 °C. Deviating operating currents may occur in other temper-ature ranges, especially in case of drives with permitted temperature above +60 °C, orin case of non-ventilated drives, due to modified winding configurations. The valuesare available from SEW‑EURODRIVE on request.

Legend:IB Acceleration current – brief inrush currentIH Holding current, rms value in the supply cable to the SEW‑EURODRIVE brake

rectifierIB/IH Inrush current ratio ESVIDC Direct current with direct DC voltage supplyVN Nominal voltage (rated voltage range)

9.3.1 BE05, BE1, BE2 brakeThe current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are rms values. Use only ap-propriate instruments for measuring rms values. The inrush current (acceleration cur-rent) IB only flows for a short time (ca. 160 ms) when the brake is released. There is noincreased inrush current if a BG or BMS brake rectifier is used or if there is a direct DCvoltage supply – only possible with brakes up to size BE2.

BE05/BE1 BE2Maximum braking torque in Nm 3.5/7 14

Rated brake coil power in W 25 34

Inrush current ratio ESV 4 4

Nominal voltage VN BE05, BE1 BE2

AC V DC VIH IG IH IG

AC A DC A AC A DC A– 241) – 0.93 – 1.220

60 (57-63) 24 0.720 0.93 0.940 1.220

120 (111-123) 48 0.355 0.465 0.470 0.610

147 (139-154) 60 0.285 0.370 0.375 0.475

184 (174-193) 80 0.225 0.295 0.295 0.385

208 (194-217) 90 0.200 0.265 0.265 0.340

230 (218-243) 96 0.181 0.235 0.235 0.305

254 (244-273) 110 0.160 0.210 0.210 0.275

290 (274-306) 125 0.143 0.186 0.187 0.240

330 (307-343) 140 0.128 0.166 0.167 0.215

360 (344-379) 160 0.113 0.147 0.149 0.193

400 (380-431) 180 0.101 0.131 0.133 0.172

460 (432-484) 200 0.090 0.118 0.121 0.156

500 (485-542) 220 0.080 0.105 0.108 0.1391) Operation with control unit BSG, BS24, BMV23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

9 Technical dataOperating currents


9.3.2 Brakes BE5, BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62The current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are rms values. Use only ap-propriate instruments for measuring rms values. The inrush current (acceleration cur-rent) IB only flows for a short time (ca. 160 ms) when the brake is released. A separatevoltage supply is not possible.

BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62Maximum braking torquein Nm

40 80 150 200/400 500/1000

Rated brake coil power inW

39 61 79 96 155

Inrush current ratio ESV 5.9 6.6 7.5 8.5 9.2

Nominal voltage VN BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62

AC V DC VIH IG IH IG IH IG IH IG IH IG

AC A DC A AC A DC A AC A DC A AC A DC A AC A DC A– 241) – 1.30 – 2.11 – 2.65 – – – –

60 (57-63) – 1.02 – 1.66 – 2.05 – – – – –

120 (111-123) – 0.51 – 0.83 – 1.03 – 1.38 – – –

147 (139-154) – 0.41 – 0.66 – 0.82 – 1.09 – – –

184 (174-193) – 0.325 – 0.52 – 0.65 – 0.88 – – –

208 (194-217) – 0.29 – 0.465 – 0.58 – 0.78 – 1.31 –

230 (218-243) – 0.255 – 0.415 – 0.52 – 0.69 – 1.16 –

254 (244-273) – 0.23 – 0.37 – 0.46 – 0.61 – 1.09 –

290 (274-306) – 0.205 – 0.33 – 0.41 – 0.55 – 0.95 –

330 (307-343) – 0.181 – 0.295 – 0.36 – 0.49 – 0.84 –

360 (344-379) – 0.161 – 0.265 – 0.325 – 0.44 – 0.74 –

400 (380-431) – 0.145 – 0.235 – 0.29 – 0.385 – 0.66 –

460 (432-484) – 0.129 – 0.21 – 0.26 – 0.345 – 0.59 –

500 (485-542) – 0.115 – 0.192 – 0.23 – 0.31 – 0.52 –1) Operation with control unit BSG, BMV

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataOperating currents


9.3.3 Brake BE120, BE122The current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are rms values. Use only ap-propriate instruments for measuring rms values. The inrush current (accelerator cur-rent) IB only flows for a short time (ca. 400 ms) when the brake is released. A separatevoltage supply is not possible.

BE120, BE122Maximum braking torque in Nm 800/1600

Rated brake coil power in W 175

Inrush current ratio ESV 6

Nominal voltage VN BE120

AC VIH

AC A230 (218-243) 1.18

254 (244-273) 1.05

290 (274-306) 0.93

360 (344-379) 0.74

400 (380-431) 0.66

460 (432-484) 0.59

500 (485-542) 0.53

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataResistances


9.4 ResistancesThe depicted values apply to the standard temperature range of -20 to +40 °C. Deviat-ing resistances may occur in other temperature ranges, especially in case of driveswith permitted temperature above +60 °C, or in case of non-ventilated drives, due tomodified winding configurations. The values are available from SEW‑EURODRIVE onrequest.

9.4.1 BE05 – BE122 resistance measurement

INFORMATIONThe colored cores of the brake coil must be removed from their terminals for the res-istance measurement; otherwise, this could lead to incorrect measurement results.For drives in design 3G-c, 3GD-c, the brake controller must always be installed in thecontrol cabinet.

Brake control system in the control cabinetThe following figure shows the brake coil resistance measurement at the auxiliary ter-minal strip in the terminal box when the brake controller is installed in the control cab-inet:

WH

BU

RD

RB

RD

WH

BU

RT

RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20°C in Ω RD RedRT Coil section resistance at 20°C in Ω WH White

BU Blue

Brake controller in the terminal boxThe following figure shows the resistance measurement when the brake controller isinstalled in the terminal box (cut-off in the AC circuit):

WH

RD

BU

9007199497350795

RB

RD

WH

BU

RT

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataResistances


The following figure shows the resistance measurement when the brake controller isinstalled in the terminal box (cut-off in the DC and AC circuit):

WH

RD

BU

18014398752093451

RB

RD

WH

BU

RT

RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20°C in Ω RD RedRT Coil section resistance at 20°C in Ω WH White

BU Blue

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



9.4.2 Brake BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5

BE05, BE1 BE2 BE5Max. braking torque Nm 3.5/7 14 40

Rated brake coil power W 25 34 39

Inrush current ratio ESV 4 4 5.8

Nominal voltage VN BE05, BE1 BE2 BE5AC V DC V RB RT RB RT RB RT

60 (57-63) 24 6.2 18.7 4.55 13.8 2.75 13.2

120 (111-123) 48 24.5 75 18.2 55 11 53

147 (139-159) 60 39 118 29 87 17.4 83

184 (174-193) 80 62 187 45.5 139 27.5 132

208 (194-217) 90 78 235 58 174 34.5 166

230 (218-243) 96 98 295 72 220 43.5 210

254 (244-273) 110 124 375 91 275 55 265

290 (274-306) 125 156 470 115 350 69 330

330 (307-343) 140 196 590 144 440 87 420

360 (344-379) 160 245 750 182 550 110 530

400 (380-431) 180 310 940 230 690 138 660

460 (432-484) 200 390 1180 280 860 174 830

500 (485-542) 220 490 1490 355 1080 220 1050

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



9.4.3 Brakes BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62

BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62Maximum braking torque in Nm 80 150 200/400 500/1000

Rated brake coil power in W 61 79 96 155

Inrush current ratio ESV 6.7 7.7 8.5 9.2

Nominal voltage VN BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62AC V RB RT RB RT RB RT RB RT

60 (57-63) 1.54 8.7 1.06 7.2 – – – –

120 (111-123) 6.2 34.5 4.25 28.5 2.9 21.5 – –

147 (139-159) 9.8 55.0 6.8 45.5 4.6 34.5 – –

184 (174-193) 15.5 87 10.7 72 6.5 54 3,95 32.5

208 (194-217) 19.5 110 13.5 91 9.2 69 5 41

230 (218-243) 24.5 138 17.0 114 11.6 86 6.3 52

254 (244-273) 31.0 174 21.5 144 14.6 108 7.8 64

290 (274-306) 39.0 220 27 181 18.3 137 9.9 80

330 (307-343) 49 275 33 225 23 172 12.6 101

360 (344-379) 62 345 42.5 285 29 215 15.8 128

400 (380-431) 78 435 53 355 35 275 19.9 163

460 (432-484) 98 550 68 455 45 335 25.5 205

500 (485-542) 119 670 83 560 56 420 31.5 260

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



9.4.4 Resistance measurement BE120, BE122The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with BMP 3.1.

WHRD BU

RB

RD

WH

BU

RT

BS Accelerator coil RD RedTS Coil section WH WhiteRB Accelerator coil resistance at 20°C in Ω BU BlueRT Coil section resistance at 20 °C in ΩVN Nominal voltage (rated voltage range)

INFORMATIONWhen measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



9.4.5 Brake BE120, BE122

BE120, BE122Maximum braking torque in Nm 800/1600

Rated brake coil power in W 175

Inrush current ratio ESV 6

Nominal voltage VN BE120, BE122AC V RB RT

60 (57-63) – –

120 (111-123) – –

147 (139-159) – –

184 (174-193) – –

208 (194-217) 7.7 37

230 (218-243) 97 47

254 (244-273) 12.2 59

290 (274-306) 15.4 74

330 (307-343) 19.4 93

360 (344-379) 24.5 118

400 (380-431) 30.5 148

460 (432-484) 38.5 187

500 (485-542) 48.5 235

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataBrake control


9.5 Brake control

INFORMATIONFor EDR../EDRN.. motors in design 3G-c and 3GD-c, brake controllers are not per-mitted in the wiring space.For EDR../EDRN.. motors in design 3D-c, brake controllers can be installed in thewiring space of the motor and in the control cabinet.

9.5.1 Installation in control cabinetThe following table lists the technical data of brake control systems for installation inthe control cabinet and the assignments with regard to motor size and connectiontechnology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make themeasier to distinguish.

EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motorsThe table below shows the standard and optional combinations of brakes and brakerectifiers for installation in control cabinets:

BE05 BE1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62 BE120, BE122BMS.. X X X − − − − − −

BME.. • • • X X X X X −

BMH.. • • • • • • • − −

BMP.. • • • • • • • − X

BMK.. • • • • • • • − −

BMV.. X X X X X X − − −

• Can be selectedX Standard for design 3G-c, 3GD-c– not permitted

Function Voltage Holding cur-rent IHmax

Size Part num-ber

Colorcode

AC V ABMS.. Half-wave rectifier without

electronic switchingAC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMS 1.5 8258023 Black

AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMS 3 8258031 Brown

BME.. Half-wave rectifier withelectronic switching

AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BME 1.5 8257221 Red

AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BME 3 825723X Blue

BMH.. Half-wave rectifier withelectronic switching and

heating function

AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMH 1.5 825818X Green

AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMH 3 8258198 Yellow

BMP.. Half-wave rectifier withelectronic switching, integ-rated voltage relay for cut-

off in the DC circuit.

AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMP 1.5 8256853 White

AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMP 3 8265666 Lightblue

AC 230 – 575 V 2.8 BMP3.1 8295077

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataBrake control



Size Part num-ber

Colorcode

AC V ABMK.. Half-wave rectifier with

electronic switching,24 V DCcontrol input, and

cut-off in the DC circuit

AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMK 1.5 8264635 Waterblue

AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMK 3 8265674 Brightred

BMV.. Brake control unit withelectronic switching, DC

24 Vcontrol input and fastcut-off

DC 24 V 5.0 BMV 5 13000063 White

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



9.5.2 Installation in the wiring space of the motor – for motors of design 3D-c onlyThe following table lists the technical data of brake control systems for installation inthe motor wiring space and the assignments with regard to motor size and connectiontechnology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make themeasier to distinguish.

EDR..71 – 315, EDRN80 – 315 motorsThe table below shows the standard and optional combinations of brakes and brakerectifiers for installation in the wiring space of the motor:

BE05 BE1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62 BE120, BE122BG.. X X X – – – – – –

BGE.. • • • X X X X X –

BS.. X X X – – – – – –

BSG.. • • • X X X – – –

BMP.. • • • • • • • • X

• Can be selectedX Standard for design 3D-c– not permitted


Size Part number Colorcode

AC V ABG.. Half-wave rectifier without

electronic switching150 – 500 1.5 BG 1.5 8253846 Black

24 – 150 3.0 BG 3 8253862 Brown

BGE.. Half-wave rectifier withelectronic switching

150 – 500 1.5 BGE 1.5 8253854 Red

42 – 150 3.0 BGE 3 8253870 Blue

BS.. Terminal block with varis-tor protection circuit

24 5.0 BS24 8267634 Water blue

BSG.. Brake control with elec-tronic switching

24 5.0 BSG 8254591 White

BMP.. Half-wave rectifier withelectronic switching, in-

tegrated voltage relay forcut-off in the DC circuit.

230 – 575 2.8 BMP3.11)

8295077

1) Only sizes 280M, 315

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



9.5.3 Installation in the wiring space of EDR..71 – 225, EDRN80 – 225 motors with additionalswitching relay BSR, BUR – for motors of design 3D-c only

The following tables show the technical data of the BSR.. and BUR.. brake controls,each with BGE.. brake control and SR.R current relay or UR.E voltage relay. The re-lays are used for the cut-off in the DC and AC circuits without additional switching con-tacts in the control cabinet.The BSR.. brake control takes the supply voltage for the brake directly from the motorterminal board, which is why it may only be used with drives operated on the supplysystem (constant voltage). The BUR.. brake control can also be used with variablespeed drives (frequency inverter operation).

BSR brake controlSR.E is assigned according to the nominal motor current in W connection:The following table shows the allocation of SR.. current relays to the nominal motorcurrent IN in W connection and the maximum holding current of the brake IHmax.IHmax= IH × 1.3 AAc

EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 312S

Current relay Nominal motor current INin W connection

Max. holding current of thebrake IHmax

A ASR10E 0.075 – 0.6 1

SR11E 0.6 – 10 1

SR15E 10 – 50 1

EDR..160 – 225, EDRN132M – 225

Current relay Nominal motor current INin W connection

Max. holding current of thebrake IHmax

A ASR15E 10 – 30 1

SR19E 30 – 90 1

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Function Voltage Holdingcurrent

IHmax

Size Part number Colorcode

AC V ABSR.. Half-wave rectifier + cur-

rent relay for cut-off inthe DC circuit

150 – 500 1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR10E 82538548282439

Red–

1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR11E 82538548282447

Red–

1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR15E 82538548282455

Red–

1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR19E 82538548283125

Red–

42 – 150 1.0 BGE 3 + SR10E 82538708282439

Blue–

1.0 BGE 3 + SR11E 82538708282447

Blue–

1.0 BGE 3 + SR15E 82538708282455

Blue–

1.0 BGE 3 + SR19E 82538708283125

Blue–

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



BUR brake controlThe BUR.. brake control combines the BGE.. control unit with an electronic voltage re-lay. The BGE.. control unit has a separate voltage supply because the voltage at themotor terminal board is not constant (motor operated on frequency inverter).With a cut-off in the AC circuit, the UR.E voltage relay triggers a cut-off in the DC cir-cuit of the brake coil almost instantaneously and the brake is applied extremely fast.The brake voltage is defined automatically on the basis of the motor phase voltagewithout further customer data Optionally, other brake voltages can be defined in ac-cordance with the following table.

Brake BUR.. (BGE.. + UR.E) for brake control in AC V79 –123

124 –138

139 –193

194 –217

218 –243

244 –273

274 –306

307 –343

344 –379

380 –431

432 –484

485 –542

BE05

BE1

BE2

BE5

BE11

BE20

BE30

BE32

UR15E UR11E Not possible

The assignement of UR.E depends on the selected brake voltage.


Size Part num-ber

Colorcode

AC V ABUR.. Half-wave rectifier +

voltage relay for cut-offin the DC circuit

150 – 500 1.0 BGE 1.5 + UR15E 82538548283141

Red–

42 – 150 BGE 3 + UR11E 82538708283133

Blue–

9.5.4 Parallel operation of several brakes with one controller

INFORMATIONFor EDR../EDRN.. motors, parallel voltage supply of two or more brakes via a singlebrake controller is not permitted due to the stricter requirements of explosion protec-tion. This means a separate brake controller must be used for each brake.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataPermitted work done by the BE brake for AC motors


9.6 Permitted work done by the BE brake for AC motorsIf you are using a brakemotor, check whether the brake is approved for use with therequired starting frequency Z. The following diagrams show the permitted brakingwork Wmax per braking operation for different brakes and rated speeds. The values aregiven with reference to the required switching frequency Z in cycles/hour (1/h).

BE122

BE120

BE62

BE60

BE32

BE30

BE20

BE11

BE5

BE2

BE05/1

1500 1/min

10

100

1000

10000

100000

Wmax

(J)

1 10 100 1000

Z (1/h)

45036000146556555

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataPermitted work done by the BE brake for AC motors


BE122

BE120

BE62

BE60

BE32

BE30

BE20

BE11

BE5

BE2

BE05/1

1800 1/min

10

100

1000

10000

100000

Wmax

(J)

1 10 100 1000

Z (1/h)

18014412947442699

INFORMATIONFor BE30 – BE122 brakes, braking operations above 1800 min-1 are not permitted.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataPermitted work done by the BE brake in case of emergency off


9.7 Permitted work done by the BE brake in case of emergency offThe permitted switching work of brakes from SEW‑EURODRIVE is defined for thespeed of 1500 min-1 and 1800 min-1 in the known Wmax/Z diagrams.Values for intermediate speeds are often required for controlled drives. The followingdiagram and the value tables apply for the operating frequency Z = 1 1/h. They list themaximally permitted braking work in the event of emergency off depending on thespeed.Maximally permitted braking work in case of emergency off braking operations:

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

22000

24000

26000

28000

30000

32000

34000

36000

38000

40000

42000

44000

46000

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000

Wm

ax

(J)

n (1/min)

BE122

BE120

BE62

BE60

BE32

BE30

BE20

BE11

BE5

BE2

BE05/1

27021603394514315

INFORMATIONFor BE30 – BE122 brakes, braking operations above 1800 min-1 are not permitted.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataPermitted work done by the BE brake in case of emergency off


9.7.1 Table with values for maximally permitted braking work in case of emergency off brakingoperations

n Wmax in Jin

1/minBE05/1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30 BE32 BE60 BE62 BE120 BE122

800 3718 4711 5873 8184 11310 15185 22777 19256 28884 28480 42720

900 3651 4462 5524 7489 10530 14474 21712 18328 27492 27040 40560

1000 3584 4212 5174 6794 9750 13764 20646 17400 26100 25600 38400

1100 3526 4103 4984 6405 9048 12935 19403 16356 24534 24080 36160

1200 3468 3995 4794 6016 8346 12106 18160 15312 22968 22560 33920

1300 3409 3886 4605 5627 7644 11278 16916 14268 21402 21040 31680

1400 3351 3778 4415 5238 6942 10449 15673 13224 19836 19520 29440

1500 3293 3669 4225 4849 6240 9620 14430 12180 18270 18000 27200

1600 3213 3580 4111 4705 6058 8979 13468 11368 17052 16800 25387

1700 3134 3492 3998 4561 5876 8337 12506 10556 15834 15600 23573

1800 3054 3403 3884 4416 5694 7696 11544 9744 14616 14400 21760

1900 2975 3315 3770 4272 5512 – – – – – –

2000 2895 3226 3657 4128 5330 – – – – – –

2100 2816 3137 3543 3984 5148 – – – – – –

2200 2736 3049 3429 3840 4966 – – – – – –

2300 2657 2960 3316 3695 4784 – – – – – –

2400 2577 2872 3202 3551 4602 – – – – – –

2500 2498 2783 3088 3407 4420 – – – – – –

2600 2418 2694 2975 3263 4238 – – – – – –

2700 2339 2606 2861 3119 4056 – – – – – –

2800 2259 2517 2747 2974 3874 – – – – – –

2900 2180 2429 2634 2830 3692 – – – – – –

3000 2100 2340 2520 2686 3510 – – – – – –

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataPermitted rolling bearings


9.8 Permitted rolling bearings

9.8.1 Rolling bearing types for EDR..71 – 280 motors

Motors A-side bearing B-side bearingAC motor Gearmotor AC motor Brakemotor

EDR..71 6204-2Z-C3 6303-2Z-C3 6203-2Z-C3 6203-2RS-C3

EDR..80, 6205-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3 6304-2RS-C3

EDR..90 – 100 6306-2Z-C3 6205-2Z-C3 6205-2RS-C3

EDR..112 – 132 6308-2Z-C3 6207-2Z-C3 6207-2RS-C3

EDR..160 6309-2Z-C3 6209-2Z-C3 6209-2RS-C3

EDR..180 6312-2Z-C3 6213-2Z-C3 6213-2RS-C3

EDR..200 – 225 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2RS-C3

EDR..250 – 280 6317-2Z-C4 6315-2Z-C3 6315-2RS-C3

9.8.2 Rolling bearing types for EDRN80 – 280 motors

Motors A-side bearing B-side bearingAC motor Gearmotor AC motor Brakemotor

EDRN80 6205-2Z-C3E2.6205-2Z-C3-K24

6304-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3E2.6304-2Z-C3-K24

6304-2RS-C3

EDRN90 6305-2Z-C3 6205-2Z-C3 6205-2RS-C3

EDRN100 6306-2Z-C3 6205-2Z-C3 6205-2RS-C3

EDRN112 6308-2Z-C3 6207-2Z-C3 6207-2RS-C3

EDRN132S 6308-2Z-C3E2.6308-2Z-C3-K24

6308-2Z-C3 6207-2Z-C3E2.6207-2Z-C3-K24

6207-2RS-C3

EDRN132M/L 6308-2Z-C3 6309-2Z-C3 6209-2Z-C3 6209-2RS-C3

EDRN160 6310-2Z-C3 6312-2Z-C3 6212-2Z-C3 6212-2RS-C3

EDRN180 6311-2Z-C3 6312-2Z-C3 6212-2Z-C3 6212-2RS-C3

EDRN200 6312-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2RS-C3

EDRN225 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2RS-C3

EDRN250 – 280 6317-2Z-C4 6315-2Z-C3

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataPermitted rolling bearings


9.8.3 Rolling bearing types for EDR..315, EDRN315 motors

Motors A-side bearing B-side bearingAC motor Gearmotor AC motor Gearmotor

EDR..315K,EDRN315S

6319-C3 6319-C3 6319-C3 6319-C3

EDR..315S,EDRN315MEDR..315M,EDRN315L

6319-C3 6322-C3 6319-C3 6322-C3

EDR..315L,EDRN315H

9.8.4 Motors with reinforced bearings /ERF for EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315 motors

Motors A-side bearing B-side bearingAC motor Gearmotor

EDR..250 – 280,EDRN250 – 280

NU317E-C3 6315-C3

EDR..315K,EDRN315S

NU319E 6319-C3 6319-C3


6322-C3

EDR..315L,EDRN315H

9.8.5 Current-insulated rolling bearings /NIB for EDR..200 – 315, EDRN200 –315 motors

Motors B-side bearingAC motor Gearmotor

EDR..200 – 225,EDRN200 – 225

6314-C3-EI 6314-C3-EI

EDR..250 – 280,EDRN250 – 280

6315-Z-C3-EI 6315-Z-C3-EI

EDR..315K,EDRN315S

6319-C3-EI 6319-C3-EI


6322-C3-EI

EDR..315L,EDRN315H

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataLubricant tables


9.9 Lubricant tables

9.9.1 Lubricant table for rolling bearings

INFORMATIONUse of wrong bearing grease can damage the bearings.

Motors with sealed bearingsThe bearings are 2Z or 2RS closed bearings and cannot be re-lubricated. They areused for DR..71 – 280, DRN80 – 280 motors.

Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type DIN designationMotor rolling bear-ings

-20 °C to +80 °C Mobile Polyrex EM1) K2P-20

+20 °C to +100 °C Klüber Barrierta L55/22) KX2U

-40 °C to +60 °C Kyodo Yushi Multemp SRL2) KE2N-40

-20 °C to +60 °C SKF LHT232) KE2N-401) Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based bearing grease)2) Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based roller bearing grease)

Motors with open bearingsMotors in the sizes DR..315 and DRN315 always have open bearings. If DR..250 –280 and DRN225 – 280 motors have the relubrication option /NS, these sizes alsohave open bearings.

Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type DIN designationRolling bearing -20 °C to +80 °C Mobile Polyrex EM1) K2P-20

-40 °C to +60 °C SKF LGHP 21) K2N-401) Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based bearing grease)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataOrder information for lubricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealants


9.10 Order information for lubricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealantsLubricants, anti-corrosion agents, and sealants may be obtained directly fromSEW‑EURODRIVE using the following order numbers.

Use Manufacturer Type Quan-tity

Order number

Lubricant for rolling bear-ings

Mobile Polyrex EM 400 g 03259420

SKF LGHP2 400 g 09101276

Lubricant for sealing ringsMaterial: NBR/FKM Klüber Petamo GHY 133N 10 g 04963458

FUCHS LUBRITECH Gleitmo 100 S 1 kg 03258092

Material: EPDM/EPP Klüber Klübersynth BLR 46-122 10 g 03252663

Corrosion protection and lubricant

SEW‑EURODRIVE NOCO® fluid 5.5 g 09107819

Sealant Marston Domsel SEW-L-Spezial 80 g 09112286

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataEncoder


9.11 Encoder

9.11.1 ES7., AS7., EG7., AG7. encodersThis table shows the general technical data for the encoders:Designation ValueOperating ambient temperature for the motor -20 °C to +40 °CStorage temperature -15 °C to +70 °CMaximum angular acceleration 104 rad/s2

9.11.2 Incremental rotary encoders with spread and plug-in shaftEncoder ES7S EV7S EG7SFor motors EDR.. 71 – 132 71 – 280 160 – 280

EDRN.. 80 – 132S 80 – 280 132M – 280Supply voltage VB DC 7 V – 30 VMax. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS

Max. pulse frequency fmax 150 kHzPeriods per revolution

A, B 1024C 1

Output amplitude per track

Vhigh 1 VSS

Vlow

Signal output sin/cosOutput current per track Iout 10 mARMS

Pulse duty factor sin/cosPhase angle A: B 90° ±3°Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2 1)

Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 2) ≤ 1000 m/s2 2) ≤ 2000 m/s2 2)

Maximum speed nmax 6000 1/mindegree of protection IP66Connection Terminal box on incremental encoder1) EN 60088-2-62) EN 60088-2-27

Encoder ES7R EV7R EG7R ES7C EV7C EG7CFor motors EDR.. 71 – 132 71 – 280 160 – 280 71 – 132 71 – 280 160 – 280

EDRN.. 80 – 132S 80 – 280 132M – 280 80 – 132S 80 – 280 132M – 280Supply voltage VB DC 7 – 30 V DC 4.75 – 30 VMax. current consumption Iin 160 mARMS 240 mARMS

Max. pulse frequency fmax 120 kHz 120 kHzPeriods per revolution

A, B 1024 1024C 1 1

Output amplitude per track

Vhigh ≥ DC 2.5 V VB -2.5 VVlow ≤ DC 0.5 V ≤ DC 1.1 V

Signal output TTL (RS422) HTL/TTL (RS422)Output current per track Iout 25 mARMS 60 mARMS

Pulse duty factor 1 : 1 ±10% 1 : 1 ±10%Phase angle A: B 90° ±20° 90° ±20°Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2 1) ≤ 100 m/s2 1)

Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 2) ≤ 2000 m/s2 2) ≤ 1000 /s2 2) ≤ 20002)m/s2 2)

Maximum speed nmax 6000 1/min 6000 1/mindegree of protection IP66 IP66Connection Terminal box on incremental encoder1) EN 60088-2-62) EN 60088-2-27 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

9Technical dataEncoder


9.11.3 Encoders AS7Y, AV7Y, and AG7YEncoder AS7Y AV7Y AG7YFor motors EDR.. 1 – 132 71 – 280 160 – 280

EDRN.. 80 – 132S 80 – 280 132M – 280Supply voltage VB DC 7 – 30 VMax. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS

Max. pulse frequency flimit 200 kHzPeriods per revolution A, B 2048

C –Output amplitude per track

Vhigh 1 VSS

Vlow


Pulse duty factor sin/cosPhase angle A: B 90° ±3°Scanning code Gray codeSingle-turn resolution 4096 increments/revolutionMulti-turn resolution 4096 revolutionsData transfer synchronous-serialSerial data output Driver to EIA RS-422Serial pulse input Recommended receiver to EIA RS-422Clock frequency Permitted range: 100 – 2000 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)Clock-pulse space period 12 – 30 µsVibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2 1)

Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 2) ≤ 2000 m/s2 2)

Maximum speed nmax 6000 1/mindegree of protection IP66Connection Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover1) EN 60088-2-62) EN 60088-2-27

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9 Technical dataEncoder


9.11.4 Encoders AS7W, AV7W, and AG7WEncoder AS7W AV7W AG7WFor motors EDR.. 71 to 132 71 to 280 160 to 280

EDRN.. 80 – 132S 80 to 280 132M – 280Supply voltage VB DC 7 – 30 VMax. current consumption Iin 150 mARMS

Max. pulse frequency fmax 200 kHzPeriods per revolution A, B 2048

C –Output amplitude per track Vhigh 1 VSS

Vlow


Pulse duty factor sin/cosPhase angle A: B 90° ± 3°Scanning code Binary codeSingle-turn resolution 8192 increments/revolutionMulti-turn resolution 65536 revolutionsData transmission RS485Serial data output Driver to EIA RS485Serial pulse input Recommended driver to EIA RS-422Clock frequency 9600 BdClock-pulse space period – –Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s21)

Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 2) ≤ 2000 m/s2 2)

Maximum speed nmax 6000 min-1

Degree of protection IP66Connection Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover1) EN 60088-2-62) EN 60088-2-27

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

9Technical dataEncoder


9.11.5 Mounting device

XV.AEncoder mounting adapter with SI units

Mounting adapter XV0A XV1A XV2A XV3A XV4A XV5AFor motors EDR..71 – 225, EDRN80 – 315

Mounting type of encoder Flange centered with coupling

Design Encodershaft

Any 6 mm 10 mm 12 mm 11 mm 12 mm

Centering Any 50 mm 50 mm 80 mm 85 mm 45 mm

Suitable for encoder Provided by the customer or by SEW‑EURODRIVE on behalf of the customer.

XC.AEncoder mounting adapter with imperial units.

Mounting adapter XC0A XC1AFor motors EDR..71 – 225, EDRN80 – 315

Mounting type of encoder Flange centered with coupling

Design Encodershaft

Any 9.55 mm (3/8‘‘)

Centering Any 31.75 mm (1.25‘‘)

Flange Any 64 mm (2.5‘‘)

Suitable for encoder Provided by the customer or by SEW‑EURODRIVE on behalf of the customer.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

10 MalfunctionsMotor malfunctions


10 Malfunctions



CAUTIONThe surfaces on the drive can be very hot during operation.Risk of burns.• Let the motor cool down sufficiently before you start working on it.

NOTICEImproper troubleshooting measures may damage the drive.The drive system might be damaged.• Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid parts list.

10.1 Motor malfunctions

Fault Possible cause MeasureMotor does not start up Supply cable interrupted Check the connections and (intermediate) ter-

minal points, correct if necessary

Brake does not release See "Brake malfunctions"

Supply cable fuse has blown Replace fuse

Motor protection (switch) hastriggered

Check that the motor protection (switch) is setcorrectly; current specification is on the name-plate

Motor protection does not trip Check motor protection control

Malfunction in control or in thecontrol process

Observe the switching sequence; correct ifnecessary

Motor only starts withdifficulty or does notstart at all

Motor power designed for deltaconnection but connected in star

Correct the connection from star to delta; fol-low the wiring diagram

Motor power designed for star-starconnection but only connected instar

Correct the connection from star to star-star;follow the wiring diagram

Voltage or frequency differs con-siderably from the setpoint, atleast when switching on the motor

Provide better power supply system; reducethe power supply load;Check cross section of supply cable, replacewith cable of larger cross section if necessary 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

10MalfunctionsMotor malfunctions


Fault Possible cause MeasureMotor does not start instar connection, only indelta connection

Star connection does not providesufficient torque

If the delta inrush current is not too high (ob-serve the regulations of the power supplier),start up directly in delta;Check the project planning and use a largermotor or special design if necessary. ContactSEW‑EURODRIVE.

Contact fault on star/delta switch Check the switch, replace if necessary;Check the connections

Incorrect direction ofrotation

Motor connected incorrectly Swap two phases of the motor supply cable

Motor hums and hashigh current consump-tion

Brake does not release See "Brake malfunctions"

Winding defective Send motor to specialist workshop for repair

Rotor rubbing Send motor to specialist workshop for repair

Fuses blow or motorprotection trips immedi-ately

Short circuit in the motor supplycable

Eliminate short circuit

Supply cables connected incor-rectly

Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram

Short circuit in the motor Send motor to specialist workshop for repair

Ground fault on motor Send motor to specialist workshop for repair

Severe speed loss un-der load

Motor overload Measure power, check project planning anduse larger motor or reduce load if necessary

Voltage drops Check cross section of supply cable, replacewith cable of larger cross section if necessary

Motor heats up excess-ively (measure temper-ature)

Overload Measure power, check project planning anduse larger motor or reduce load if necessary

Insufficient cooling Provide for cooling air supply or clear coolingair passages, retrofit forced cooling fan if ne-cessary. Check the air filter, clean or replace ifnecessary

Ambient temperature too high Observe the permitted temperature range, re-duce the load if necessary

Motor in delta connection insteadof star connection as intended

Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram

Loose contact in incoming cable(one phase missing)

Tighten loose contact, check connections, ob-serve wiring diagram

Fuse blown Look for and rectify cause; replace fuse

Line voltage deviates from therated motor voltage by more than5% (range A) / 10% (range B).

Adjust motor to line voltage

Nominal duty cycle (S1 to S10,DIN 57530) exceeded, e.g. causedby excessive starting frequency

Adjust the nominal duty cycle of the motor tothe required operating conditions; consult aprofessional to determine the proper drive, ifnecessary

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

10 MalfunctionsBrake malfunctions


Fault Possible cause MeasureExcessively loud Ball bearing compressed, dirty or

damagedRe-align motor and the driven machine, in-spect rolling bearing and replace if necessary.

Vibration of rotating parts Look for the cause, possibly an imbalance;correct the cause, observe method for balan-cing

Foreign objects in cooling air ducts Clean cooling air ducts

10.2 Brake malfunctions

Fault Possible cause MeasureBrake does not re-lease

Incorrect voltage on brake controlunit

Apply the correct voltage; brake voltage specifiedon the nameplate

Brake control unit failed Install a new brake control, check resistance andinsulation of the brake coils (see "Resistance"chapter for resistance values)Check switchgear, replace if necessary

Max. permitted working air gap ex-ceeded because brake lining worndown

Measure and set working air gap.If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.

Voltage drop along supply cable >10%

Provide correct connection voltage: brake voltagespecifications on the nameplate. Check the cablecross section of the brake cable; increase crosssection if necessary

Inadequate cooling, brake over-heats

Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling airpassages, check air filter, clean or replace if ne-cessary.

Brake coil has interturn fault orshort circuit to frame

Check resistance and insulation of the brake coils(see "Resistance" chapter for resistance values);Replace complete brake and brake control (spe-cialist workshop),Check switchgear, replace if necessary

Rectifier defective Replace rectifier and brake coil; it may be moreeconomical to replace the complete brake

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

10MalfunctionsMalfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter


Fault Possible cause MeasureBrake does notbrake

Working air gap not correct Measure and set working air gap.If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.

Brake lining worn down Replace entire brake disk.

Incorrect braking torque Check the project planning and change the brak-ing torque if needed; see chapter "Technical Data"> "Work done, working air gap, braking torques"• by changing the type and number of brake

springs.• by selecting a different brake

Working air gap so large that set-ting nuts for the manual brake re-lease come into contact

Set the working air gap.

Manual brake release device notset correctly

Set the adjusting nuts for the manual brake re-lease correctly

Brake locked by manual brake re-lease HF

Loosen the set screw, remove if needed.

Brake is appliedwith time lag

Brake is switched only on ACvoltage side

Switch both, the DC and AC voltage sides; ob-serve wiring diagram

Noises in vicinityof brake

Gearing wear on the brake disk orthe driver caused by jerky startup

Check the project planning, replace the brake diskif necessaryHave a specialist workshop replace the driver

Alternating torques due to incor-rectly set frequency inverter

Check correct setting of frequency inverter ac-cording to its operating instructions, correct if ne-cessary.

10.3 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverterThe symptoms described in chapter Motor malfunctions may also occur when the mo-tor is operated with a frequency inverter. Please refer to the frequency inverter operat-ing instructions for the meaning of the problems that occur and to find informationabout rectifying the problems.

10.4 Disposal

Dispose of the motors in accordance with the material structure and the regulations inforce:• Iron• Aluminum• Copper• Plastics• Electronic parts• Oil and grease (not mixed with solvents)

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

10 MalfunctionsCustomer service


10.5 Customer service

Have the following information available if you require customer service assist-ance:• Nameplate data (complete)• Nature and extent of the problem• Time the failure occurred and any accompanying circumstances• Assumed cause• Ambient conditions e.g.:

– Ambient temperature– Humidity– Installation altitude– Dirt– etc.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11AppendixWiring diagrams


11 Appendix11.1 Wiring diagrams

INFORMATIONThe motor should be connected as shown in the connection wiring diagram or the ter-minal assignment diagram, which are supplied with the motor. The following sectiononly shows a selection of the common types of connections. You can obtain the rel-evant wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.

11.1.1 Wiring diagram R13 (68001 xx 06)

Delta connectionThe following figure shows m connection for low voltage.

V1U1 W1

[1]

(T5)(T4) (T6)V2U2 W2

W2 U2

V1U1

V2

W1(T2)(T1) (T3)

L2L1 L3

[2]

[3]

(T4)(T6) (T5)

(T2)(T1) (T3)

9007199497344139

[1] Motor winding [3] Incoming cables[2] Motor terminal board

Star connectionThe following figure shows W connection for high voltage.

V1U1 W1

[1]

(T5)(T4) (T6)

(T2)(T1) (T3)

(T6) (T4) (T5)V2U2 W2 W2 U2 V2

[2]

[3]W1V1U1(T3)(T2)(T1)

L3L2L1

9007199497339147


Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 – L2

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11 AppendixWiring diagrams


11.1.2 Wiring diagram C13 (68184 xx 08)

Delta connectionThe following figure shows m connection for low voltage.

[1]

V1U1 W1

V2U2 W2

[2]

U1 W2 V1 U2 W1 V2

PE L1 L2 L3[3]

2931852427


Star connectionThe following figure shows W connection for high voltage.

V1U1 W1

[1]

V2U2 W2

[2]

U1 W2 V1 U2 W1 V2

PE L1 L2 L3[3]

2931850507


Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 – L2.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



11.1.3 Brake control systems

BG, BGE, BS, BSG

12

78

70

1 2 3 4 5

36

14 4.3

60.5

32.5

4040861323

BMS.., BME.., BMH.., BMP.., BMK.., BMKB.., BMV..

15

14

13

4

3

2

1

BM. ...

75

5 68

1)

22.5

91.5

4040894987

[1] Support rail mounting EN 50022-35-7.5

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Current relay9E1RS5E1RS - 0E1RS

Stripped

Conductor

end sleeves

Nameplate

O-ring

Stripped

Conductor

end sleeves

Nameplate

O-ring

5621709323

SR10E SR11E SR15E SR19EMaximum permitteddirect current

1 A

Max. transformercurrent

0.075 – 0.6 A 0.6 – 10 A 10 – 50 A 20 – 90 A

Part number 0822439 08282447 08282455 08283125

Ambient temperat-ure1)

-15 to +40 °C

Storage temperature -25 to +125 °C1) Ambient temperature of the drive

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



Voltage relay

UR11E - UR15E

Stripped

Nameplate

Conductor end sleeves

O-ring

5621711755

UR11E UR15EMaximum permitted direct current 1 A

Permitted AC voltage 42 – 150 V 150 – 500 V

Part number 0823133 0823141

Ambient temperature1) -15 to +40 °C

Storage temperature -25 to +125 °C1) Ambient temperature of the drive

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



11.1.4 Brake controller – wiring diagrams

Key

AC

Cut-off in the AC circuit(standard application of the brake)

DCCut-off in the DC circuit(rapid brake application)

AC

DC Cut-off in the DC and AC circuits(Rapid brake application)

BS

TS

BrakeBS = Accelerator coilTS = Coil section

1a

2a

5a

4a

3a

Auxiliary terminal strip in terminal box

Motor with delta connection

Motor with star connection

Control cabinet limit

WH White

RD Red

BU Blue

BN Brown

BK Black

More wiring diagrams of brake controllers are available on request.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



BGE brake control

AC

1

2

5

4

3

BU

WH

RD

BGE

ACU

M

TS

BS

9007204718863115

AC

DC

1

2

5

4

3

BU

WH

RD

BGE

AC

M

TS

BS

5464124043

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



BME brake control

AC

BU

UAC

WH

RD1a

2a

5a

4a

3a

BME1

2

13

14

15

4

3M

TS

BS

5464996619

AC

DC

BU

AC

WH

RD1a

2a

5a

4a

3a

BME1

2

13

14

15

4

3M

TS

BS

5464998539

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



BMP 3.1 brake control (installation in terminal box)

AC

1 2 3

13 14 15

ACU

RDBU

WH

[1]

AC

DC

ACU

[2]BMP3.1 BMP3.1

[1]

1 2 3

13 14 15

RD BUWH

18014402495360011

[1] Brake coil[2] Wire jumper

BMP 3.1 brake control (installation in control cabinet)

BMP3.1BMP3.1

AC

1 2 3

[2] 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a

ACU

AC

DC 1 2 3

1a 2a 3a 4a 5a

ACU

[3]

13 14 15 13 14 15

[2]

RD BUWH RD BUWH

[1][1]

18014402495362699

[1] Brake coil[2] Terminal strip[3] Wire jumper

INFORMATIONThere is no need for the jumper in alternating current operation (AC) if connection 5ais wired directly to connection 3.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17



11.1.5 ES7. / AS7. / EG7. / AG7. encodersObserve the notes in chapter "Encoder connection" when connecting the encoder.

+UB A A B B C C D D

AS7W,AG7W

AS7Y,AG7Y

ES7C,EG7C,ES7R,EG7R

ES7S,EG7S

D

C

B

A

D

B

C

A

+UB

+VB +VB +VB +VB

DGND DGND DGND DGND

Cos+ Cos+ A Cos+

Cos- Cos- A Cos-

Sin+ Sin+ B Sin+

Sin- Sin- B Sin-

– Clock+ C C

– Clock- C C

Data+ Data+ – Data+

Data- Data- – Data-23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017



11.1.6 Terminal strips 1 and 2The following figure shows the correct arrangement of the terminal strips for EDR..71– 132, EDRN80 – 132S with brake, and with aluminum terminal box in different cableentry positions. The terminal strips must be arranged after the terminal box is turned. Itis significant that the axis of terminal strip 2 is always aligned in a right angle to therotary axis of the rotor.

Cable entry 1 and 3, here using 3 as anexample1)

Cable entry X and 2, here using X as anexample1)

[x]

[2]

[b]

[1] [3]

[a][a]

18014401781313419

1) If terminal strip 1 does not exist, you can install terminal strip 2 in the position for terminal strip 1 or forthe rectifier.

[1] Cable entry 1 [X] Cable entry X[2] Cable entry 2 [a] Terminal strip 1 (or rectifier in design 3D-c)[3] Cable entry 3 [b] Terminal strip 2The terminals can vary in appearance and design depending on the terminal box vari-ant and the connected options.

INFORMATION• Loosen any cables that are already connected before taking out terminal strip 2.• The connected cables must be free from bends and twists, etc. when they are

connected again.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11 AppendixOperation and maintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with part number groups 2097... and2098...


11.2 Operation and maintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with partnumber groups 2097... and 2098...

ATEX_IECEx_BA_08052017_EN.docx 1 of 6

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS WISTRO EXPLOSION-PROTECTED EXTERNAL FAN UNITS for use in dust or gas explosion hazard areas SERIES FLAI size 63 250

The standards applicable to these operating instructions can be found in the applicable COC. For ATEX areas DIN EN standards are used, for IECEx areas IEC standards. Zone division and assignment of Wistro external fans by category and protection level

Zone Duration of presence of the

explosive atmosphere Device

category Device protection

level EPL

Gases, vapours, mists 2 rare 3G Gc

Dusts 22 rare 3D Dc

IECEx zone 22/2 approval Ex ec IIC T3 Gc Devices of the group IIC and IIIC for use in the remaining explosive areas Ex tc IIIC T120 °C Dc (above ground) for zone 2 and 22

IEC 60079-7 Type of ignition protection: ec, non-sparking equipment Group: IIC, group IIC gases Temperature class: T3 EPL: Gc IEC 60079-31 Type of ignition protection: tc, protection with housing Group: IIIC, conductive dust Temperature class: T=120 °C EPL: Dc

ATEX 3D/3G approval II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 ec Devices of the group IIC and IIIC for use in the remaining explosive areas II 3D Ex tc IIIC T120 °C Dc (above ground) for category 3D/3G

DIN EN 60079-7 Type of ignition protection: ec, non-sparking equipment Group: IIC, group IIC gases Temperature class: T3 EPL: Gc DIN EN 60079-31 Type of ignition protection: tc, protection with housing Group: IIIC, conductive dust Temperature class: T=120 °C EPL: Dc

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11AppendixOperation and maintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with part number groups 2097... and

2098...



The external fan is intended for the cooling of electric motors used in explosive areas of zone 2 or 22. The motor to be cooled must comply with the standard IEC/DIN EN 60079-0 and the part of standard IEC/DIN EN 60079 on which the corresponding degree of ignition protection is based. The max. permissible surface temperature is 120 °C for group IIIC and T3 for group IIC devices. The protection class for the motor and terminal box is IP66. Use of the fan for other purposes than external ventilation is not permitted within the scope of the approval the ambient temperature may be between -20 °C and +40 °C. The unit is generally not suitable for use in chemical atmospheres nor for the transport of flammable liquids.

X identification:

- Measurement of the maximum surface temperature was carried out in accordance with DIN 60034-1 or IEC 600079-7 with a voltage deviation of ±5 % defined as range A and without dust deposits.

- The impeller must not be exposed to UV radiation. - Due to the geometry of the threads of the terminal box cover, the cable gland /

blind plug must have a sealing

The relevant safety regulation with regard to protection from touching moving parts (DIN EN ISO 13857) is fulfilled. Before installation care must be taken that the fan wheel moves freely and the blades of the impeller are not deformed or bent. This may cause imbalance, which can have a negative effect on the operating life. Protection class IP 10 on the air outlet side must be ensured by the operator at the location of use as per IEC/ DIN EN 60034-5. If the customer applies a coating, the design test certificate is void. The resulting changes must be evaluated by the customer. Installation of the device must be carried out in a non-explosive atmosphere by qualified personnel and must be evaluated and documented by a suitably competent person. During installation it must be ensured that the connection diameter of the motor to be cooled matches the tube diameter. Deviations result in irregular tubes and the necessary minimum air gap between the impeller and the tube might no longer be maintained. The electrical connection is made according to the operating mode in accordance with the connection diagram (see appendix). The connection diagram has also been affixed to the terminal box cover. The specifications of IEC/ DIN EN 60079-14 must also be observed for the connection. The internal connections are made using spring-cage terminals, the cables to be connected must be provided with wire end sleeves. Connectible conductor cross sections are rigid 0.08-4 mm² (AWG 28-12) and flexible 0.08-2.5 mm²(AWG 28-14). Cable glands and sealing plugs must have ATEX or IECEx system approval and be suitable for the intended use. So as to not impair the IP protection class of the machine, they must have min. IP64. The threads in the terminal box are of M16x1.5 design (for Bg63-160 2x M16x1.5). This can be adjusted to M20x1.5 upon customer request. The cable gland / blind plug must have a seal (according to IEC 60079-31). The unit must be earthed via the earth connection in the housing. Earthing is via the screw connection provided in the terminal box (tightening torque 4.5 Nm) using cables with wire end sleeve or ring cable lug and a serrated lock screw. The cable cross section must be min. 0.75 mm². The external earthing of the external fan must be via the attachment screws at the customer motor. The cross section must be min. 4 mm². The contact surfaces must be bare metal. The earthing screw must be protected against detachment by a suitable device (serrated lock screw, locking mesh etc.). After installation corrosion protection must be applied to retain conductivity. The max. permissible currents can be found in the table "Operating voltage range for series IL/ILL" (see appendix). The permitted tolerance of the voltage range corresponds to range A according to DIN EN 60034-1 (±5 %). In the Bg63-160 a posistor has additionally been installed due to the low motor currents. To avoid exceeding the above-mentioned surface temperatures during a fault the use of an overvoltage protection and/or the posistor (Bg63-160) with a suitable trigger device should be ensured.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11 AppendixOperation and maintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with part number groups 2097... and



After electrical connection is complete, the terminal box must be attached with screws tightened to a torque of 4.5 Nm.

After installation and during commissioning a test run must be carried out. Here, care must be taken that the fan wheel rotates in the same as the direction of the arrow marked on the inner surface of the air intake grille and therefore blows air over the motor to be cooled. Caution: The cooling effect is considerably lower if the direction of rotation is incorrect. There is a risk of the motor to be cooled overheating and the surface temperature of the fan motor of T=120 °C being exceeded. During operation care must be taken that especially in dusty atmospheres that there is no excessive build-up of dust on the fan blades, as this can also result in imbalance which reduces the operating life and may result in friction which could cause ignition. This also applies to atmospheres containing particles, e.g. in the wood processing industry or in coal grinding mills. Caution: Prior to opening the fan a cooling down phase of 5 min. must be waited. WISTRO units are normally supplied ready for installation. The bearings are maintenance-free. The radial shaft seal has been designed for an average service life of 20,000 operating hours. In case of longer operating periods, the external fan must be replaced with a new unit. Repairs or modifications of the unit must only be carried out in consultation with WISTRO. Manufacturer: WISTRO Elektro-Mechanik GmbH Berliner Allee 29-31 D30855 Langenhagen

4.5 +0.5 Nm

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17




Annex 1

U2

PE L1L1L1L1

U1

V2 W2

L3L3L3L3L2L2L2L2

V1 W1

L3L3L3L3

U2 V2

L1L1L1L1

U1

L2L2L2L2

V1

W2

W1

3~

3~

T1 T2

PE T1 T2

Sternschaltung

Dreieckschaltung

W1(T3) = braunW2 (T6) = gelb

V1 (T2) = hellblau V2 (T5) = weiß

U1 (T1) = schwarz U2 (T4) = grün

Elektrischer Anschluss

Power Supply

Star connection

Delta connection

U1(T1) = black W1(T3) = brown V1(T2) = light blue U2(T4) = green W2(T6) = yellow V2(T5) = white

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11 AppendixOperation and maintenance instructions for forced cooling fan /VE with part number groups 2097... and



Annex 2 Operating voltage range IL/ILI Three-phase motors 3~230V/400V

Referenced to b-side bearing cover

(°C)

B20 IL-2-9 40

B20 IL-2-9 40

B20 IL-2-9 40

B31 IL-2-9 40

B31 IL-2-9 40

B31 IL-2-9 40

C36 IL-2-9 40

C36 IL-4-9 40

C62 IL-2-9 40

C62 IL-4-9 40

D48 IL-4-9 40

F50 IL-4-9 40

B20 IL-2-9 40

B20 IL-2-9 40

B20 IL-2-9 40

B31 IL-2-9 40

B31 IL-2-9 40

B31 IL-2-9 40

C36 IL-2-9 40

C36 IL-4-9 40

C62 IL-2-9 40

C62 IL-4-9 40

D48 IL-4-9 40

F50 IL-4-9 40

260

250-450 466,3 200-303 220-332 1,20 509

204-249 373,2 200-303 220-332 0,68

405

160-200 299,5 200-303 220-332 0,47 97

160-200 299,5 200-303 220-332 1,36

183

132 248,4 200-303 220-332 0,48 91

132 248,4 200-303 220-332 0,67

123

112 210 200-303 220-332 0,42 144

100 186,2 200-303 220-332 0,44

42

90 168 200-303 220-332 0,44 120

80 147,9 200-303 220-332 0,13

34

71 129,6 200-303 220-332 0,13 35

3~ 63 114,5 200-303 220-332 0,13

260

250-450 466,3 346-525 380-575 0,69 509

204-249 373,2 346-525 380-575 0,39

405

160-200 299,5 346-525 380-575 0,27 97

160-200 299,5 346-525 380-575 0,79

183

132 248,4 346-525 380-575 0,28 91

132 248,4 346-525 380-575 0,39

123

112 210 346-525 380-575 0,24 144

100 186,2 346-525 380-575 0,25

42

90 168 346-525 380-575 0,25 120

80 147,9 346-525 380-575 0,08

34

71 129,6 346-525 380-575 0,08 35

3~ Y 63 114,5 346-525 380-575 0,08

Ma

x. p

ow

er

co

nsu

mp

tio

n

Max.

perm

issib

le a

mbie

nt

tem

p.

(mm) 50Hz 60Hz (A) (W)

Op

era

tin

g m

od

e

Siz

e

Mo

tor

typ

e

Fa

n d

iam

ete

r

Vo

lta

ge

ra

ng

e

Ma

x. p

erm

issib

le c

urr

en

t

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17




Operating voltage range IL/ILI Three-phase motors 3~115 V/200 V

Referenced to b-side bearing cover

(°C)

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

B31 IL-2-10 40

97

112 210 100-122 100-135 0,96 104

100 186,2 100-122 100-135 0,94

88

90 168 100-122 100-135 0,98 89

80 147,9 100-122 100-135 0,99

87

71 129,6 100-122 100-135 0,98 85

3~ 63 114,5 100-122 100-135 1,00

97

112 210 174-210 174-234 0,55 104

100 186,2 174-210 174-234 0,54

88

90 168 174-210 174-234 0,57 89

80 147,9 174-210 174-234 0,57

87

71 129,6 174-210 174-234 0,57 85

3~ Y 63 114,5 174-210 174-234 0,58

Ma

x. p

ow

er

co

nsu

mp

tio

n

Max.

perm

issib

le a

mbie

nt

tem

p.

(mm) 50Hz 60Hz (A) (W)

Op

era

tin

g m

od

e

Siz

e

Mo

tor

typ

e

Fa

n d

iam

ete

r

Vo

lta

ge

ra

ng

e

Ma

x. p

erm

issib

le c

urr

en

t

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

11 AppendixCertificates


11.3 Certificates

INFORMATIONThe IECEx certificates for motor, encoder and forced cooling fan are not supplied.You can find them with the IECEx certificate number specified on the nameplate atwww.iecex.com.

The certificates for motors with the approval for the Brazilian market by INMETRO is-sued by DNV are available from SEW‑EURODRIVE on request.The certificates for motors with the approval for the Korean market issued by KOSHAare available from SEW‑EURODRIVE on request.

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12Address list


12 Address listAlgeriaSales Algiers REDUCOM Sarl

16, rue des Frères ZaghnouneBellevue16200 El Harrach Alger

Tel. +213 21 8214-91Fax +213 21 8222-84http://[email protected]

ArgentinaAssemblySales

Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A.Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial GarínProv. de Buenos Aires


AustraliaAssemblySalesService

Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD.27 Beverage DriveTullamarine, Victoria 3043


Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD.9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill ParkNew South Wales, 2164

Tel. +61 2 9725-9900Fax +61 2 [email protected]

AustriaAssemblySalesService

Vienna SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.Richard-Strauss-Straße 241230 Wien

Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30http://[email protected]

BangladeshSales Bangladesh SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED

345 DIT RoadEast RampuraDhaka-1219, Bangladesh

Tel. +88 01729 [email protected]

BelarusSales Minsk Foreign unitary production enterprise SEW-

EURODRIVERybalkoStr. 26220033 Minsk

Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58Fax +375 17 298 47 54http://[email protected]

BelgiumAssemblySalesService

Brussels SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a.Researchpark Haasrode 1060Evenementenlaan 73001 Leuven


Service CompetenceCenter

IndustrialGears

SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a.Rue de Parc Industriel, 316900 Marche-en-Famenne


BrazilProductionSalesService

São Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – RodoviaSantos Dumont Km 49Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP

Tel. +55 19 [email protected]

AssemblySalesService

Rio Claro SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172Condomínio Industrial ConparkCaixa Postal: 32713501-600 – Rio Claro / SP


Joinville SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba89239-270 – Joinville / SC


BulgariaSales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH

Bogdanovetz Str.11606 Sofia

Tel. +359 2 9151160Fax +359 2 [email protected]

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12 Address list


CameroonSales Douala SEW-EURODRIVE S.A.R.L.

Ancienne Route BonabériP.O. BoxB.P 8674Douala-Cameroun

Tel. +237 233 39 02 10Fax +237 233 39 02 10info@sew-eurodrive-cm

CanadaAssemblySalesService

Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.210 Walker DriveBramalea, ON L6T 3W1


Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.Tilbury Industrial Park7188 Honeyman StreetDelta, BC V4G 1G1


Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.2555 Rue LegerLasalle, PQ H8N 2V9


ChileAssemblySalesService

Santiago deChile

SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDALas Encinas 1295Parque Industrial Valle GrandeLAMPASantiago de ChileP.O. BoxCasilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile

Tel. +56 2 2757 7000Fax +56 2 2757 7001http://[email protected]

ChinaProductionAssemblySalesService

Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDATianjin 300457

Tel. +86 22 25322612Fax +86 22 25323273http://[email protected]


Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.333, Suhong Middle RoadSuzhou Industrial ParkJiangsu Province, 215021


Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd.No. 9, JunDa RoadEast Section of GETDDGuangzhou 510530


Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd.10A-2, 6th RoadShenyang Economic Technological Develop-ment AreaShenyang, 110141


Taiyuan SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd.No.3, HuaZhang Street,TaiYuan Economic & Technical DevelopmentZoneShanXi, 030032

Tel. +86-351-7117520Fax [email protected]

Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd.10A-2, 6th RoadNo. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA430056 Wuhan


Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd.No. 12 Jinye 2nd RoadXi'An High-Technology Industrial DevelopmentZoneXi'An 710065


SalesService

Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.Unit No. 801-806, 8th FloorHong Leong Industrial ComplexNo. 4, Wang Kwong RoadKowloon, Hong Kong

Tel. +852 36902200Fax +852 [email protected]

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12Address list


ColombiaAssemblySalesService

Bogota SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.Calle 17 No. 132-18Interior 2 Bodega 6, Manzana BSantafé de Bogotá


CroatiaSalesService

Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o.Zeleni dol 1010 000 Zagreb


Czech RepublicAssemblySalesService

Hostivice SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o.Floriánova 2459253 01 Hostivice


Drive ServiceHotline / 24Hour Service

+420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW) ServiceTel. +420 255 709 632Fax +420 235 358 [email protected]

DenmarkAssemblySalesService

Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/SGeminivej 28-302670 Greve

Tel. +45 43 95 8500Fax +45 43 9585-09http://[email protected]

EgyptSalesService

Cairo Copam Egyptfor Engineering & AgenciesBuilding 10, Block 13005, First Industrial Zone,Obour City Cairo

Tel. +202 44812673 / 79 (7 lines)Fax +202 44812685http://[email protected]

EstoniaSales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS

Reti tee 475301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa

Tel. +372 6593230Fax +372 6593231http://[email protected]

FinlandAssemblySalesService

Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OYVesimäentie 415860 Hollola


Service Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OYKeskikankaantie 2115860 Hollola


ProductionAssembly

Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears OySantasalonkatu 6, PL 803620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila


FranceProductionSalesService

Hagenau SEW-USOCOME48-54 route de SoufflenheimB. P. 2018567506 Haguenau Cedex

Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00http://[email protected]

Production Forbach SEW-USOCOMEZone industrielleTechnopôle Forbach SudB. P. 3026957604 Forbach Cedex

Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00

Brumath SEW-USOCOME1 Rue de Bruxelles67670 Mommenheim Cedex

Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 00


Bordeaux SEW-USOCOMEParc d'activités de Magellan62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 18233607 Pessac Cedex

Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00Fax +33 5 57 26 39 0923

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

12 Address list


FranceLyon SEW-USOCOME

75 rue Antoine Condorcet38090 Vaulx-Milieu

Tel. +33 4 74 99 60 00Fax +33 4 74 99 60 15

Nantes SEW-USOCOMEParc d’activités de la forêt4 rue des Fontenelles44140 Le Bignon

Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20

Paris SEW-USOCOMEZone industrielle2 rue Denis Papin77390 Verneuil I'Étang

Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88

GabonSales Libreville SEW-EURODRIVE SARL

183, Rue 5.033.C, Lalala à droiteP.O. Box 15682Libreville

Tel. +241 03 28 81 55+241 06 54 81 33http://[email protected]

GermanyHeadquartersProductionSales

Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGErnst-Blickle-Straße 4276646 Bruchsal


Production / IndustrialGears

Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGChristian-Pähr-Str. 1076646 Bruchsal

Tel. +49 7251 75-0Fax +49 7251 75-2970

Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGErnst-Blickle-Straße 176676 Graben-NeudorfP.O. BoxPostfach 1220 – D-76671 Graben-Neudorf

Tel. +49 7251 75-0Fax +49 7251-2970

Östringen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, WerkÖstringenFranz-Gurk-Straße 276684 Östringen


Service CompetenceCenter

Mechanics /Mechatronics

SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGErnst-Blickle-Straße 176676 Graben-Neudorf


Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGErnst-Blickle-Straße 4276646 Bruchsal


Drive TechnologyCenter

North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGAlte Ricklinger Straße 40-4230823 Garbsen (Hannover)


East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGDänkritzer Weg 108393 Meerane (Zwickau)


South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGDomagkstraße 585551 Kirchheim (München)


West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGSiemensstraße 140764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf)


Drive Center Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGAlexander-Meißner-Straße 4412526 Berlin

Tel. +49 306331131-30Fax +49 [email protected]

Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGc/o BASF SEGebäude W130 Raum 10167056 Ludwigshafen

Tel. +49 7251 75 3759Fax +49 7251 75 [email protected]

Saarland SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGGottlieb-Daimler-Straße 466773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler


Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGDieselstraße 1889160 Dornstadt

Tel. +49 7348 9885-0Fax +49 7348 [email protected] 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

2017

12Address list


GermanyWürzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

Nürnbergerstraße 11897076 Würzburg-Lengfeld


Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service 0 800 SEWHELP0 800 7394357

Great BritainAssemblySalesService

Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.DeVilliers WayTrident ParkNormantonWest YorkshireWF6 1GX


Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service Tel. 01924 896911

GreeceSales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

12, K. Mavromichali StreetP.O. Box 8013618545 Piraeus

Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34Fax +30 2 1042 251-59http://[email protected]

HungarySalesService

Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.Csillaghegyí út 13.1037 Budapest

Tel. +36 1 437 06-58Fax +36 1 437 06-50http://[email protected]

IcelandSales Reykjavik Varma & Vélaverk ehf.

Knarrarvogi 4104 Reykjavík

Tel. +354 585 1070Fax +354 585)1071http://[email protected]

IndiaRegistered OfficeAssemblySalesService

Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private LimitedPlot No. 4, GIDCPOR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243Gujarat



Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private LimitedPlot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase IIMambakkam VillageSriperumbudur - 602105Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu


Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private LimitedPlant: Plot No. D236/1,Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II,Warale, Tal- Khed,Pune-410501, Maharashtra


IndonesiaSales Medan PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari

Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri MedanIIMedan 20252

Tel. +62 61 687 1221Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61 6871458 / +6261 [email protected]@yahoo.comhttp://www.serumpunindah.com

Jakarta PT. Cahaya Sukses AbadiKomplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99,SunterJakarta 14350


Jakarta PT. Agrindo Putra LestariJL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra In-dustri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III,Blok E No. 27Jakarta 14470

Tel. +62 21 2921-8899Fax +62 21 [email protected]://www.aplindo.com

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12 Address list


IndonesiaSurabaya PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI

Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi PermaiG6 No. 11Surabaya 60111

Tel. +62 31 5990128Fax +62 31 [email protected]://www.triagri.co.id

Surabaya CV. Multi MasJl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18Surabaya 60174

Tel. +62 31 5458589Fax +62 31 [email protected]://www.cvmultimas.com

IrelandSalesService

Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd.48 Moyle RoadDublin Industrial EstateGlasnevin, Dublin 11


IsraelSales Tel Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd.

Ahofer Str 34B / 22858858 Holon


ItalyAssemblySalesService

Milan SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.Via Bernini,1420020 Solaro (Milano)

Tel. +39 02 96 980229Fax +39 02 96 980 999http://[email protected]

Ivory CoastSales Abidjan SEW-EURODRIVE SARL

Ivory CoastRue des Pêcheurs, Zone 326 BP 916 Abidjan 26

Tel. +225 21 21 81 05Fax +225 21 25 30 [email protected]://www.sew-eurodrive.ci

JapanAssemblySalesService

Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD250-1, Shimoman-no,IwataShizuoka 438-0818

Tel. +81 538 373811Fax +81 538 373814http://[email protected]@sew-eurodrive.co.jp

KazakhstanSales Almaty SEW-EURODRIVE LLP

291-291A, Tole bi street050031, Almaty

Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156Fax +7 (727) 350 5156http://[email protected]

Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLPRepresentative office in Uzbekistan96A, Sharaf Rashidov street,Tashkent, 100084


Ulaanbaatar IM Trading LLCNarny zam street 62Sukhbaatar district,Ulaanbaatar 14230

Tel. +976-77109997Fax [email protected]

KenyaSales Nairobi SEW-EURODRIVE Pty Ltd

Transnational Plaza, 5th FloorMama Ngina StreetP.O. Box 8998-00100Nairobi

Tel. +254 791 398840http://[email protected]

LatviaSales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul

Katlakalna 11C1073 Riga


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12Address list


LebanonSales (Lebanon) Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl

B. P. 80484Bourj Hammoud, Beirut


Sales (Jordan, Kuwait ,Saudi Arabia, Syria)

Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore)Sin El Fil.B. P. 55-378Beirut


LithuaniaSales Alytus UAB Irseva

Statybininku 106C63431 Alytus


Luxembourgrepresentation: Belgium

MacedoniaSales Skopje Boznos DOOEL

Dime Anicin 2A/7A1000 Skopje

Tel. +389 23256553Fax +389 23256554http://www.boznos.mk

MalaysiaAssemblySalesService

Johor SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHDNo. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya81000 Johor Bahru, JohorWest Malaysia


MexikoAssemblySalesService

Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V.SEM-981118-M93Tequisquiapan No. 102Parque Industrial QuéretaroC.P. 76220Querétaro, México


SalesService

Puebla SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V.Calzada Zavaleta No. 3922 Piso 2 Local 6Col. Santa Cruz BuenavistaC.P. 72154Puebla, México

Tel. +52 (222) 221 248http://[email protected]

MongoliaTechnical Office Ulaanbaatar IM Trading LLC

Narny zam street 62Union building, Suite A-403-1Sukhbaatar district,Ulaanbaatar 14230

Tel. +976-77109997Tel. +976-99070395Fax +976-77109997http://imt.mn/[email protected]

MoroccoSalesService

Bouskoura SEW-EURODRIVE MoroccoParc Industriel CFCIM, Lot 55 and 59Bouskoura

Tel. +212 522 88 85 00Fax +212 522 88 84 50http://[email protected]

NamibiaSales Swakopmund DB Mining & Industrial Services

Einstein StreetStrauss Industrial ParkUnit1Swakopmund


NetherlandsAssemblySalesService

Rotterdam SEW-EURODRIVE B.V.Industrieweg 1753044 AS RotterdamPostbus 100853004 AB Rotterdam

Tel. +31 10 4463-700Fax +31 10 4155-552Service: 0800-SEWHELPhttp://[email protected]

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12 Address list


New ZealandAssemblySalesService

Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.P.O. Box 58-42882 Greenmount driveEast Tamaki Auckland


Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.30 Lodestar Avenue, WigramChristchurch


NigeriaSales Lagos Greenpeg Nig. Ltd

Plot 296A, Adeyemo Akapo Str. Omole GRAIkeja Lagos-Nigeria

Tel. +234-701-821-9200-1http://[email protected]

NorwayAssemblySalesService

Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/SSolgaard skog 711599 Moss


PakistanSales Karachi Industrial Power Drives

Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com-mercial Area,Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,Karachi

Tel. +92 21 452 9369Fax +92-21-454 [email protected]

ParaguaySales Fernando de la

MoraSEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.LDe la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva AsunciónDepartamento CentralFernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino


PeruAssemblySalesService

Lima SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C.Los Calderos, 120-124Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima


PhilippinesSales Makati P.T. Cerna Corporation

4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. CruzMakati City 1205

Tel. +63 2 519 6214Fax +63 2 890 [email protected]://www.ptcerna.com

PolandAssemblySalesService

Łódź SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.ul. Techniczna 592-518 Łódź


Service Tel. +48 42 293 0030Fax +48 42 293 0043

24 Hour ServiceTel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW)[email protected]

PortugalAssemblySalesService

Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 863050-379 Mealhada


RomaniaSalesService

Bucharest Sialco Trading SRLstr. Brazilia nr. 36011783 Bucuresti


RussiaAssemblySalesService

St. Petersburg ЗАО «СЕВ-ЕВРОДРАЙФ»а. я. 36195220 Санкт-Петербург

Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142Fax +7 812 3332523http://[email protected]

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12Address list


Sambiarepresentation: South Africa

SenegalSales Dakar SENEMECA

Mécanique GénéraleKm 8, Route de RufisqueB.P. 3251, Dakar


SerbiaSales Belgrade DIPAR d.o.o.

Ustanicka 128aPC Košum, IV floor11000 Beograd

Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393Fax +381 11 347 [email protected]

SingaporeAssemblySalesService

Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.No 9, Tuas Drive 2Jurong Industrial EstateSingapore 638644

Tel. +65 68621701Fax +65 68612827http://[email protected]

SlovakiaSales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.

Rybničná 40831 06 Bratislava

Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201Fax +421 2 33595 200http://[email protected]

Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.Slovenská ulica 26040 01 Košice

Tel. +421 55 671 2245Fax +421 55 671 2254Mobile +421 907 671 [email protected]

SloveniaSalesService

Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.UI. XIV. divizije 143000 Celje

Tel. +386 3 490 83-20Fax +386 3 490 [email protected]

South AfricaAssemblySalesService

Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITEDEurodrive HouseCnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome RoadsAeroton Ext. 2Johannesburg 2013P.O.Box 90004Bertsham 2013


Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITEDRainbow ParkCnr. Racecourse & Omuramba RoadMontague GardensCape TownP.O.Box 36556Chempet 7442

Tel. +27 21 552-9820Fax +27 21 552-9830Telex 576 [email protected]

Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED48 Prospecton RoadIsipingoDurbanP.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605


Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED7 Christie CrescentVintoniaP.O.Box 1942Nelspruit 1200


South KoreaAssemblySalesService

Ansan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.7, Dangjaengi-ro,Danwon-gu,Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839


2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12 Address list


South KoreaBusan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.

28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil,Gangseo-gu,Busan, Zip 618-820

Tel. +82 51 832-0204Fax +82 51 832-0230

SpainAssemblySalesService

Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L.Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 30248170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)

Tel. +34 94 43184-70http://[email protected]

Sri LankaSales Colombo SM International (Pte) Ltd

254, Galle RaodColombo 4, Sri Lanka

Tel. +94 1 2584887Fax +94 1 2582981

SwazilandSales Manzini C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd

PO Box 2960Manzini M200


SwedenAssemblySalesService

Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE ABGnejsvägen 6-8553 03 JönköpingBox 3100 S-550 03 Jönköping


SwitzerlandAssemblySalesService

Basel Alfred lmhof A.G.Jurastrasse 104142 Münchenstein bei Basel


TaiwanSales Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd.

6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2Tung Huw S. RoadTaipei

Tel. +886 2 27383535Fax +886 2 27368268Telex 27 [email protected]://www.tingshou.com.tw

Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd.No. 55 Kung Yeh N. RoadIndustrial DistrictNan Tou 540

Tel. +886 49 255353Fax +886 49 [email protected]://www.tingshou.com.tw

TanzaniaSales Daressalam SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA

Plot 52, Regent EstatePO Box 106274Dar Es Salaam


ThailandAssemblySalesService

Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.700/456, Moo.7, DonhuarohMuangChonburi 20000


TunisiaSales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service

Zone Industrielle Mghira 2Lot No. 392082 Fouchana


TurkeyAssemblySalesService

Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE HareketSistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. StiGebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 40141480 Gebze Kocaeli

Tel. +90 262 9991000 04Fax +90 262 9991009http://[email protected]

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

12Address list


UkraineAssemblySalesService

Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв»ул. Рабочая, 23-B, офис 40949008 Днепр


UruguayAssemblySales

Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A.Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina CorumbeCP 12000 Montevideo


USAProductionAssemblySalesService

SoutheastRegion

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.1295 Old Spartanburg HighwayP.O. Box 518Lyman, S.C. 29365

Tel. +1 864 439-7537Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830Fax Production +1 864 439-9948Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557http://[email protected]


NortheastRegion

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.Pureland Ind. Complex2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014


MidwestRegion

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.2001 West Main StreetTroy, Ohio 45373


SouthwestRegion

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.3950 Platinum WayDallas, Texas 75237


WesternRegion

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.30599 San Antonio St.Hayward, CA 94544


Wellford SEW-EURODRIVE INC.148/150 Finch Rd.Wellford, S.C. 29385

[email protected]

Additional addresses for service provided on request!

UzbekistanTechnical Office Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP

Representative office in Uzbekistan96A, Sharaf Rashidov street,Tashkent, 100084


VietnamSales Ho Chi Minh

CityNam Trung Co., LtdHuế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town,Binh Duong ProvinceHCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen StreetDistrict 10, Ho Chi Minh City

Tel. +84 8 8301026Fax +84 8 [email protected]://www.namtrung.com.vn

Hanoi MICO LTDQuảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except Construction Materials8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao DuyAnh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Tel. +84 4 39386666Fax +84 4 3938 [email protected]://www.micogroup.com.vn

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/20

17

Index

IndexA

Add-on encoder ................................................... 83AG7. .................................................................... 83AH7. .................................................................... 83Alternative connections ....................................... 28Altitude, installation ............................................. 63Ambient conditions .............................................. 63

Ambient temperature...................................... 63Hazardous radiation ....................................... 64

Anti-condensation heating............................. 63, 84Application project planning

Special.......................................................... 115Typical .......................................................... 111

AS7...................................................................... 83ATEX mark .......................................................... 25Auxiliary terminals, arrangement ....................... 231

B

Backstop............................................................ 183BE05 – 2............................................................ 167Bearing lubrication............................................. 141Bearings

Reinforced .................................................... 142Belt pulleys .......................................................... 34Brake

BE................................................................. 204BE05 – 2....................................................... 167BE05 – 20..................................................... 168BE120........................................................... 168BE122........................................................... 169BE30............................................................. 168BE32............................................................. 169BE60............................................................. 168BE62............................................................. 169Braking torques ............................................ 188Braking work................................................. 188Dimension drawings BMS, BME, BMH, BMP,BMK, BMV.................................................... 223Working air gap ............................................ 188

Brake connection................................................. 74Brake control ....................................................... 56

BGE.............................................................. 227BME.............................................................. 228

Brake control block diagramsBMP 3.1 brake control (control cabinet) ....... 229BMP3.1 brake control (motor) ...................... 229

Brake control of BE brakeControl cabinet ............................................. 198Installation in motor wiring space ................. 200

Brake malfunctions............................................ 218Brake replacement

DR.71 – 80, DRN80 ..................................... 177EDR..250 – 315, EDRN250 – 315................ 180EDR..90 – 225, EDRN90 – 225.................... 178

Brakemotor structureEDR..160 – 315............................................ 163EDR..71 – 80................................................ 161EDR..90 – 132.............................................. 162

BrakesDimension drawings BG, BGE, BS, BSG..... 223

Braking torques ................................................. 188Braking work...................................................... 188

C

Cable entries ....................................................... 56Cage clamp ......................................................... 40Canopy ................................................................ 34CE marking.......................................................... 25Changing the blocking direction ........................ 183Changing the brake disk carrier

BE05 – 122................................................... 171Changing the brake spring

BE05 – 122................................................... 174Changing the braking torque

BE120 – 122................................................. 173Changing the magnet body

BE05 – 122................................................... 175Characteristic curve................................... 112, 114Cleaning ............................................................ 137Configuration ..................................................... 116Connecting forced cooling fan............................. 82Connecting the brake control .............................. 74Connecting the motor .......................................... 67

KCC terminal strip .......................................... 73Terminal board ............................................... 69via terminal strip ............................................. 73

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/17


Index

ConnectionCable ............................................................ 140Encoder .......................................................... 84Motor .............................................................. 67Notes .............................................................. 67PE................................................................... 71Wiring diagram ............................................... 67

Connection type of the motor .............................. 67Continuous duty

EPL "Gc" and "Dc" ......................................... 87Equipment protection level b .......................... 87

Copyright notice .................................................... 8Counter sinkings.................................................. 56Customer service .............................................. 220

D

DC link voltage .................................................... 90Degree of protection.......................................... 137Delta connection

C13............................................................... 222R13............................................................... 221

Design2D-b, 2G-b, 2GD-b, 3D-c, 3G-c, 3GD-c ......... 65

Design 2GD-bMotor circuit breaker....................................... 66

Design 2GD-b and 3GD-cSurface temperature....................................... 65Temperature classes...................................... 65

Designated use ................................................... 11Drive components, installation ............................ 35Drying, motor ....................................................... 32Dusts ................................................................... 64

E

EDR.. type designationBearing ........................................................... 29Connection variants........................................ 28Encoder .......................................................... 28Explosion-proof motors .................................. 27Mechanical attachments................................. 27Other additional features ................................ 29Output designs ............................................... 27Temperature sensor and temperature detection....................................................................... 28Ventilation....................................................... 29

EG7. .................................................................... 83

EH7. .................................................................... 83Electrical connection ........................................... 14Electrical installation............................................ 55Electrostatic charging

Painting .......................................................... 47Embedded safety notes......................................... 7EMC..................................................... 59, 100, 110Encoder ............................................................... 28

AG7. ............................................................... 83AH7. ............................................................... 83AS7................................................................. 83Connection ..................................................... 84EG7. ............................................................... 83EH7. ............................................................... 83ES7................................................................. 83Technical data .............................................. 212Wiring diagram ............................................. 230

Encoder mounting adapter .................................. 38Energy recovery .................................................. 90Environmental impact .......................................... 64EPL c

Safe operation of motors .............................. 101Equipment protection level b

Safe operation of motors ................................ 91Equipotential bonding.......................................... 56ES7...................................................................... 83Exclusion of liability ............................................... 8Explosion-proof motors ....................................... 27Extended storage ................................................ 31

F

Forced cooling fan, VE ........................................ 82Frequency inverter ................................ 90, 92, 102

Operation........................................................ 89Parameter setting EPL "Gc" and "Dc" .......... 133

Frequency inverter operation .............................. 57

G

Gases .................................................................. 64Gaskets ............................................................... 64Gearmotors ............................................... 100, 110Grounding...................................................... 56, 59

at the terminal box.......................................... 58NF................................................................... 58

Group drive........................................................ 1242301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/17


Index

H

Hazard symbolsMeaning............................................................ 7

Heating ................................................................ 84Hollow shaft rotary encoder................................. 39HR/HF manual brake release, retrofitting.......... 181

I

Improving the grounding...................................... 59Information

Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 7Inspecting the brakemotor

Brakemotor................................................... 164Inspecting the motor

DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 ........................ 159EDR..71 – 315.............................................. 159EDRN..80 – 315 ........................................... 159

Inspection .......................................................... 136Inspection intervals............................................ 138Installation

Electrical......................................................... 55In damp locations or outdoors ........................ 34Mechanical ..................................................... 30Tolerances...................................................... 35XH.A encoder mounting adapter .................... 39

Installation altitude............................................... 63Installation regulations......................................... 55Installation tolerances.......................................... 35Installation, conditions ......................................... 30Insulation resistance............................................ 31Intervals for inspection and maintenance.......... 138Inverter assignment

EPL b.............................................................. 92EPL c............................................................ 102

Isolation transformer............................................ 32

K

KCC terminal strip ............................................... 73KTY84-130 .......................................................... 80KTY84-130 temperature sensor .......................... 80

L

Line voltage ....................................................... 117Low-voltage equipment ....................................... 55Lubricant table................................................... 210Lubrication......................................................... 141

M

Maintenance...................................................... 136Maintenance intervals ....................................... 138Malfunctions ...................................................... 216Malfunctions when operating with a frequency in-

verter ............................................................ 219Mark, nameplate.................................................. 25Mechanical attachments...................................... 27Mechanical installation ........................................ 30Monitoring............................................................ 66Motor

Connecting the terminal strip.......................... 73Design 2GD-b and 3GD-c .............................. 65Drying ............................................................. 32Extended storage ........................................... 31Setup .............................................................. 33

Motor circuit breaker............................................ 66Design 2G-b, 2D-b and 2GD-b....................... 66

Motor designation................................................ 26Motor feet

Retrofitting/modifying motor feet .................... 47Motor malfunctions ............................................ 216Motor protection .................................. 66, 100, 110

Motor circuit breaker....................................... 66Motor protection device ....................................... 57Motor structure .................................................... 16Motor/inverter assignment ........................... 92, 102Mounting adapter .......................................... 36, 38

Encoder .......................................................... 36XV................................................. 149, 150, 152

Mounting designs ................................................ 27Mounting XH.A .................................................... 39MOVITRAC® B..................................................... 92

N

Nameplate ........................................................... 22Additional nameplate for frequency inverter... 23Frequency inverter ......................................... 23Marking........................................................... 25

NotesDesignation in the documentation .................... 6

O

Operating currents............................................. 189Operating modes................................................. 85 23

0193

28/E

N –

10/

17


Index

OperationSafety notes ................................................... 15

Operation on a frequency inverter ................. 57, 89Options .................................................... 27, 29, 78Output designs .................................................... 27Output filter ........................................................ 120

P

Painting ............................................................. 137Parameter setting

Frequency inverters for EPL Gb and Db ...... 127Frequency inverters for equipment protectionlevel c ........................................................... 133

PE connection ..................................................... 71Preliminary work for motor and brake maintenance

..................................................................... 143Product names ...................................................... 8Protection device................................................. 66Protective earth ................................................... 57PT100.................................................................. 82PT100 temperature detection.............................. 82PT1000................................................................ 81PT1000 temperature detection............................ 81PTC thermistor .................................................... 66Pulse voltage....................................................... 89

R

Reinforced bearings .......................................... 142Relubrication ..................................................... 141Relubrication device .......................................... 141Relubrication intervals ....................................... 142Removing the absolute encoder........ 149, 150, 152Removing the encoder

..................... 143, 145, 146, 147, 149, 150, 152EG7. and AG7. ..................................... 145, 146EH7. and AH7. ............................................. 147ES7. and AS7............................................... 143EV.., AV.., and XV.. ...................... 149, 150, 152

Removing the incremental encoder... 149, 150, 152EV.., AV.., and XV.. ...................... 149, 150, 152

Removing the rotary encoder .... 143, 145, 146, 147EG7. and AG7. ..................................... 145, 146EH7. and AH7. ............................................. 147ES7. and AS7............................................... 143

Removing the special encoder .......... 149, 150, 152Repair ................................................................ 137

Repairs .............................................................. 137Resistance......................................................... 192Resistance measurement of the brake...... 192, 196Restrictions to application ................................... 12Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release ........... 50Retrofitting the HR/HF manual brake release ... 181Rights to claim under limited warranty .................. 7Ring cable lug, connection .................................. 70Rolling bearing .................................................. 208RS ..................................................................... 183

S

Safe operationMotors equipment protection level b .............. 91Motors of EPL c............................................ 101

Safety cover ........................................................ 52Safety notes

Designated use .............................................. 11Designation in the documentation .................... 6Electrical connection ...................................... 14Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 7Preliminary information..................................... 9Setup .............................................................. 12Storage........................................................... 12Structure of embedded..................................... 7Structure of the section-related ........................ 6

Second shaft end ................................................ 52Section-related safety notes.................................. 6Serial number ...................................................... 25Setting the working air gap

BE05 – 122................................................... 170Setup ............................................................. 12, 33Signal words in safety notes.................................. 6Soft start .............................................................. 88Soft starter ........................................................... 88Solid wire, connection ......................................... 70Spare parts ........................................................ 137Special aspects in switching operation................ 62Special design ..................................................... 30Star connection

C13............................................................... 222R13............................................................... 221

Startup............................................................... 125Safety notes ................................................... 15

Storage, extended ............................................... 31Strip heater .......................................................... 84

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/17


Index

StructureBrakemotor................................... 161, 162, 163EDR..160 – 180, EDRN132M – 180....... 18, 155EDR..160 – 315 with BE............................... 163EDR..200 – 225, EDRN200 – 225.......... 19, 156EDR..250 – 280, EDRN250 – 280.......... 20, 157EDR..315, EDRN315.............................. 21, 158EDR..71 – 132, EDRN80 – 132S ........... 17, 154EDR..71 – 80 with BE................................... 161EDR..90 – 132 with BE................................. 162Motor....... 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158

Supply of cooling air ............................................ 33Surface temperature

Design 2GD-b and 3GD-c .............................. 65Switch contacts ........................................... 55, 125Switching operation ............................................. 62

Equipment protection level b .......................... 87

T

Tapped holes....................................................... 56Target group........................................................ 10Technical data ................................................... 186

Absolute encoder ......................................... 214Incremental rotary encoders with plug-in shaft..................................................................... 212Incremental rotary encoders with spread shaft..................................................................... 212Mounting adapter ......................................... 215SSI absolute encoder ................................... 213

Temperature........................................................ 63Temperature class

Design 2GD-b and 3GD-c .............................. 65Temperature sensor (/TF) ................................... 66Temperature sensor/temperature detection ........ 28Terminal board .................................................... 69Terminal box

Tightening torques.......................................... 46Turn ................................................................ 40With cage clamp............................................. 40

With terminal board and anti-twist frame........ 42Terminal strip....................................................... 73

KCC................................................................ 73Terminal strip arrangement ............................... 231Terminal strips, arrangement ............................ 231Terminal voltage........................................ 111, 115

Calculating.................................................... 116TF ........................................................................ 79TF temperature sensor .................................. 66, 79Thermal motor protection .......................... 100, 110Tightening torques terminal box .......................... 46Trademarks ........................................................... 8Transport ............................................................. 12Type designation ................................................. 26

Temperature detection ................................... 28Type examination certificate................................ 25Types

Overview ........................................................ 27

V

Vapors ................................................................. 64VE........................................................................ 82VE forced cooling fan

Mounting....................................................... 153Ventilation............................................................ 29VIK mark.............................................................. 25

W

Waste disposal .................................................. 219Wear.................................................................. 138Wiring .................................................................. 57Wiring diagram

R13 delta connection.................................... 221R13 star connection ..................................... 221

Wiring diagrams .......................................... 67, 221C13 delta connection.................................... 222C13 star connection ..................................... 222Encoder ........................................................ 230

Work done, BE brake ........................................ 204Working air gap ................................................. 188

2301

9328

/EN

– 1

0/17


SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world

SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KGErnst-Blickle-Str. 4276646 BRUCHSALGERMANYTel. +49 7251 75-0Fax +49 7251 [email protected]

Operating Instructions - SEW-Eurodrive

Documents

Transcript of Operating Instructions - SEW-Eurodrive